Annotation of OpenXM/src/OpenMath/doc/texinfo.tex, Revision 1.1
1.1 ! tam 1: % texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files.
! 2: %
! 3: % Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex.
! 4: \expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi
! 5: %
! 6: \def\texinfoversion{1999-09-25.10}
! 7: %
! 8: % Copyright (C) 1985, 86, 88, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99
! 9: % Free Software Foundation, Inc.
! 10: %
! 11: % This texinfo.tex file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
! 12: % modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
! 13: % published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at
! 14: % your option) any later version.
! 15: %
! 16: % This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be
! 17: % useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty
! 18: % of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
! 19: % General Public License for more details.
! 20: %
! 21: % You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
! 22: % along with this texinfo.tex file; see the file COPYING. If not, write
! 23: % to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330,
! 24: % Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
! 25: %
! 26: % In other words, you are welcome to use, share and improve this program.
! 27: % You are forbidden to forbid anyone else to use, share and improve
! 28: % what you give them. Help stamp out software-hoarding!
! 29: %
! 30: % Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug
! 31: % reports; you can get the latest version from:
! 32: % ftp://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/texinfo.tex
! 33: % (and all GNU mirrors, see http://www.gnu.org/order/ftp.html)
! 34: % ftp://texinfo.org/tex/texinfo.tex
! 35: % ftp://us.ctan.org/macros/texinfo/texinfo.tex
! 36: % (and all CTAN mirrors, finger ctan@us.ctan.org for a list).
! 37: % /home/gd/gnu/doc/texinfo.tex on the GNU machines.
! 38: % The texinfo.tex in any given Texinfo distribution could well be out
! 39: % of date, so if that's what you're using, please check.
! 40: % Texinfo has a small home page at http://texinfo.org/.
! 41: %
! 42: % Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org. Please include including a
! 43: % complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the
! 44: % problem. Patches are, of course, greatly appreciated.
! 45: %
! 46: % To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the
! 47: % texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution. For a simple
! 48: % manual foo.texi, however, you can get away with this:
! 49: % tex foo.texi
! 50: % texindex foo.??
! 51: % tex foo.texi
! 52: % tex foo.texi
! 53: % dvips foo.dvi -o # or whatever, to process the dvi file; this makes foo.ps.
! 54: % The extra runs of TeX get the cross-reference information correct.
! 55: % Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more
! 56: % than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary.
! 57: %
! 58: % It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages. You can get
! 59: % the existing language-specific files from ftp://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/texinfo/.
! 60:
! 61: \message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:}
! 62:
! 63: % If in a .fmt file, print the version number
! 64: % and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because
! 65: % they might have appeared in the input file name.
! 66: \everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}%
! 67: \catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active}
! 68:
! 69: % Save some parts of plain tex whose names we will redefine.
! 70: \let\ptexb=\b
! 71: \let\ptexbullet=\bullet
! 72: \let\ptexc=\c
! 73: \let\ptexcomma=\,
! 74: \let\ptexdot=\.
! 75: \let\ptexdots=\dots
! 76: \let\ptexend=\end
! 77: \let\ptexequiv=\equiv
! 78: \let\ptexexclam=\!
! 79: \let\ptexi=\i
! 80: \let\ptexlbrace=\{
! 81: \let\ptexrbrace=\}
! 82: \let\ptexstar=\*
! 83: \let\ptext=\t
! 84:
! 85: % We never want plain's outer \+ definition in Texinfo.
! 86: % For @tex, we can use \tabalign.
! 87: \let\+ = \relax
! 88:
! 89: \message{Basics,}
! 90: \chardef\other=12
! 91:
! 92: % If this character appears in an error message or help string, it
! 93: % starts a new line in the output.
! 94: \newlinechar = `^^J
! 95:
! 96: % Set up fixed words for English if not already set.
! 97: \ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi
! 98: \ifx\putwordChapter\undefined \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi
! 99: \ifx\putwordfile\undefined \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi
! 100: \ifx\putwordin\undefined \gdef\putwordin{in}\fi
! 101: \ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi
! 102: \ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi
! 103: \ifx\putwordInfo\undefined \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi
! 104: \ifx\putwordInstanceVariableof\undefined \gdef\putwordInstanceVariableof{Instance Variable of}\fi
! 105: \ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi
! 106: \ifx\putwordNoTitle\undefined \gdef\putwordNoTitle{No Title}\fi
! 107: \ifx\putwordof\undefined \gdef\putwordof{of}\fi
! 108: \ifx\putwordon\undefined \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi
! 109: \ifx\putwordpage\undefined \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi
! 110: \ifx\putwordsection\undefined \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi
! 111: \ifx\putwordSection\undefined \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi
! 112: \ifx\putwordsee\undefined \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi
! 113: \ifx\putwordSee\undefined \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi
! 114: \ifx\putwordShortTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordShortTOC{Short Contents}\fi
! 115: \ifx\putwordTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordTOC{Table of Contents}\fi
! 116: %
! 117: \ifx\putwordMJan\undefined \gdef\putwordMJan{January}\fi
! 118: \ifx\putwordMFeb\undefined \gdef\putwordMFeb{February}\fi
! 119: \ifx\putwordMMar\undefined \gdef\putwordMMar{March}\fi
! 120: \ifx\putwordMApr\undefined \gdef\putwordMApr{April}\fi
! 121: \ifx\putwordMMay\undefined \gdef\putwordMMay{May}\fi
! 122: \ifx\putwordMJun\undefined \gdef\putwordMJun{June}\fi
! 123: \ifx\putwordMJul\undefined \gdef\putwordMJul{July}\fi
! 124: \ifx\putwordMAug\undefined \gdef\putwordMAug{August}\fi
! 125: \ifx\putwordMSep\undefined \gdef\putwordMSep{September}\fi
! 126: \ifx\putwordMOct\undefined \gdef\putwordMOct{October}\fi
! 127: \ifx\putwordMNov\undefined \gdef\putwordMNov{November}\fi
! 128: \ifx\putwordMDec\undefined \gdef\putwordMDec{December}\fi
! 129: %
! 130: \ifx\putwordDefmac\undefined \gdef\putwordDefmac{Macro}\fi
! 131: \ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi
! 132: \ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi
! 133: \ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi
! 134: \ifx\putwordDeftypevar\undefined\gdef\putwordDeftypevar{Variable}\fi
! 135: \ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi
! 136: \ifx\putwordDeftypefun\undefined\gdef\putwordDeftypefun{Function}\fi
! 137:
! 138: % Ignore a token.
! 139: %
! 140: \def\gobble#1{}
! 141:
! 142: \hyphenation{ap-pen-dix}
! 143: \hyphenation{mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers}
! 144: \hyphenation{eshell}
! 145: \hyphenation{white-space}
! 146:
! 147: % Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages.
! 148: \newdimen \bindingoffset
! 149: \newdimen \normaloffset
! 150: \newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight
! 151:
! 152: % Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file
! 153: % and nothing on the terminal. We don't just call \tracingall here,
! 154: % since that produces some useless output on the terminal.
! 155: %
! 156: \def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}%
! 157: \ifx\eTeXversion\undefined
! 158: \def\loggingall{\tracingcommands2 \tracingstats2
! 159: \tracingpages1 \tracingoutput1 \tracinglostchars1
! 160: \tracingmacros2 \tracingparagraphs1 \tracingrestores1
! 161: \showboxbreadth\maxdimen\showboxdepth\maxdimen
! 162: }%
! 163: \else
! 164: \def\loggingall{\tracingcommands3 \tracingstats2
! 165: \tracingpages1 \tracingoutput1 \tracinglostchars1
! 166: \tracingmacros2 \tracingparagraphs1 \tracingrestores1
! 167: \tracingscantokens1 \tracingassigns1 \tracingifs1
! 168: \tracinggroups1 \tracingnesting2
! 169: \showboxbreadth\maxdimen\showboxdepth\maxdimen
! 170: }%
! 171: \fi
! 172:
! 173: % For @cropmarks command.
! 174: % Do @cropmarks to get crop marks.
! 175: %
! 176: \newif\ifcropmarks
! 177: \let\cropmarks = \cropmarkstrue
! 178: %
! 179: % Dimensions to add cropmarks at corners.
! 180: % Added by P. A. MacKay, 12 Nov. 1986
! 181: %
! 182: \newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines
! 183: \newdimen\cornerlong \cornerlong=1pc
! 184: \newdimen\cornerthick \cornerthick=.3pt
! 185: \newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in
! 186:
! 187: % Main output routine.
! 188: \chardef\PAGE = 255
! 189: \output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}
! 190:
! 191: \newbox\headlinebox
! 192: \newbox\footlinebox
! 193:
! 194: % \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument. Note that \pagecontents
! 195: % does insertions, but you have to call it yourself.
! 196: \def\onepageout#1{%
! 197: \ifcropmarks \hoffset=0pt \else \hoffset=\normaloffset \fi
! 198: %
! 199: \ifodd\pageno \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset
! 200: \else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi
! 201: %
! 202: % Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in
! 203: % the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code).
! 204: \setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makeheadline}%
! 205: \setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makefootline}%
! 206: %
! 207: {%
! 208: % Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to
! 209: % take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends
! 210: % before the \shipout runs.
! 211: %
! 212: \escapechar = `\\ % use backslash in output files.
! 213: \indexdummies % don't expand commands in the output.
! 214: \normalturnoffactive % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if
! 215: % the page break happens to be in the middle of an example.
! 216: \shipout\vbox{%
! 217: \ifcropmarks \vbox to \outervsize\bgroup
! 218: \hsize = \outerhsize
! 219: \vskip-\topandbottommargin
! 220: \vtop to0pt{%
! 221: \line{\ewtop\hfil\ewtop}%
! 222: \nointerlineskip
! 223: \line{%
! 224: \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nstop}%
! 225: \hfill
! 226: \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nstop}%
! 227: }%
! 228: \vss}%
! 229: \vskip\topandbottommargin
! 230: \line\bgroup
! 231: \hfil % center the page within the outer (page) hsize.
! 232: \ifodd\pageno\hskip\bindingoffset\fi
! 233: \vbox\bgroup
! 234: \fi
! 235: %
! 236: \unvbox\headlinebox
! 237: \pagebody{#1}%
! 238: \ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt
! 239: % Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty.
! 240: % (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingxxx.)
! 241: % The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect.
! 242: \vskip 2\baselineskip
! 243: \unvbox\footlinebox
! 244: \fi
! 245: %
! 246: \ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfmkdest{\the\pageno} \fi
! 247: %
! 248: \ifcropmarks
! 249: \egroup % end of \vbox\bgroup
! 250: \hfil\egroup % end of (centering) \line\bgroup
! 251: \vskip\topandbottommargin plus1fill minus1fill
! 252: \boxmaxdepth = \cornerthick
! 253: \vbox to0pt{\vss
! 254: \line{%
! 255: \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nsbot}%
! 256: \hfill
! 257: \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nsbot}%
! 258: }%
! 259: \nointerlineskip
! 260: \line{\ewbot\hfil\ewbot}%
! 261: }%
! 262: \egroup % \vbox from first cropmarks clause
! 263: \fi
! 264: }% end of \shipout\vbox
! 265: }% end of group with \turnoffactive
! 266: \advancepageno
! 267: \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi
! 268: }
! 269:
! 270: \newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen
! 271:
! 272: \def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\pageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}}
! 273: {\catcode`\@ =11
! 274: \gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi
! 275: % marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala)
! 276: \ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present
! 277: \rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi
! 278: \dimen@=\dp#1 \unvbox#1
! 279: \ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi
! 280: \ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi}
! 281: }
! 282:
! 283: % Here are the rules for the cropmarks. Note that they are
! 284: % offset so that the space between them is truly \outerhsize or \outervsize
! 285: % (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986)
! 286: %
! 287: \def\ewtop{\vrule height\cornerthick depth0pt width\cornerlong}
! 288: \def\nstop{\vbox
! 289: {\hrule height\cornerthick depth\cornerlong width\cornerthick}}
! 290: \def\ewbot{\vrule height0pt depth\cornerthick width\cornerlong}
! 291: \def\nsbot{\vbox
! 292: {\hrule height\cornerlong depth\cornerthick width\cornerthick}}
! 293:
! 294: % Parse an argument, then pass it to #1. The argument is the rest of
! 295: % the input line (except we remove a trailing comment). #1 should be a
! 296: % macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument.
! 297: %
! 298: \def\parsearg#1{%
! 299: \let\next = #1%
! 300: \begingroup
! 301: \obeylines
! 302: \futurelet\temp\parseargx
! 303: }
! 304:
! 305: % If the next token is an obeyed space (from an @example environment or
! 306: % the like), remove it and recurse. Otherwise, we're done.
! 307: \def\parseargx{%
! 308: % \obeyedspace is defined far below, after the definition of \sepspaces.
! 309: \ifx\obeyedspace\temp
! 310: \expandafter\parseargdiscardspace
! 311: \else
! 312: \expandafter\parseargline
! 313: \fi
! 314: }
! 315:
! 316: % Remove a single space (as the delimiter token to the macro call).
! 317: {\obeyspaces %
! 318: \gdef\parseargdiscardspace {\futurelet\temp\parseargx}}
! 319:
! 320: {\obeylines %
! 321: \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{%
! 322: \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg.
! 323: %
! 324: % First remove any @c comment, then any @comment.
! 325: % Result of each macro is put in \toks0.
! 326: \argremovec #1\c\relax %
! 327: \expandafter\argremovecomment \the\toks0 \comment\relax %
! 328: %
! 329: % Call the caller's macro, saved as \next in \parsearg.
! 330: \expandafter\next\expandafter{\the\toks0}%
! 331: }%
! 332: }
! 333:
! 334: % Since all \c{,omment} does is throw away the argument, we can let TeX
! 335: % do that for us. The \relax here is matched by the \relax in the call
! 336: % in \parseargline; it could be more or less anything, its purpose is
! 337: % just to delimit the argument to the \c.
! 338: \def\argremovec#1\c#2\relax{\toks0 = {#1}}
! 339: \def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\relax{\toks0 = {#1}}
! 340:
! 341: % \argremovec{,omment} might leave us with trailing spaces, though; e.g.,
! 342: % @end itemize @c foo
! 343: % will have two active spaces as part of the argument with the
! 344: % `itemize'. Here we remove all active spaces from #1, and assign the
! 345: % result to \toks0.
! 346: %
! 347: % This loses if there are any *other* active characters besides spaces
! 348: % in the argument -- _ ^ +, for example -- since they get expanded.
! 349: % Fortunately, Texinfo does not define any such commands. (If it ever
! 350: % does, the catcode of the characters in questionwill have to be changed
! 351: % here.) But this means we cannot call \removeactivespaces as part of
! 352: % \argremovec{,omment}, since @c uses \parsearg, and thus the argument
! 353: % that \parsearg gets might well have any character at all in it.
! 354: %
! 355: \def\removeactivespaces#1{%
! 356: \begingroup
! 357: \ignoreactivespaces
! 358: \edef\temp{#1}%
! 359: \global\toks0 = \expandafter{\temp}%
! 360: \endgroup
! 361: }
! 362:
! 363: % Change the active space to expand to nothing.
! 364: %
! 365: \begingroup
! 366: \obeyspaces
! 367: \gdef\ignoreactivespaces{\obeyspaces\let =\empty}
! 368: \endgroup
! 369:
! 370:
! 371: \def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next}
! 372:
! 373: %% These are used to keep @begin/@end levels from running away
! 374: %% Call \inENV within environments (after a \begingroup)
! 375: \newif\ifENV \ENVfalse \def\inENV{\ifENV\relax\else\ENVtrue\fi}
! 376: \def\ENVcheck{%
! 377: \ifENV\errmessage{Still within an environment; press RETURN to continue}
! 378: \endgroup\fi} % This is not perfect, but it should reduce lossage
! 379:
! 380: % @begin foo is the same as @foo, for now.
! 381: \newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.}
! 382:
! 383: \outer\def\begin{\parsearg\beginxxx}
! 384:
! 385: \def\beginxxx #1{%
! 386: \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\relax
! 387: {\errhelp=\EMsimple \errmessage{Undefined command @begin #1}}\else
! 388: \csname #1\endcsname\fi}
! 389:
! 390: % @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo.
! 391: %
! 392: \def\end{\parsearg\endxxx}
! 393: \def\endxxx #1{%
! 394: \removeactivespaces{#1}%
! 395: \edef\endthing{\the\toks0}%
! 396: %
! 397: \expandafter\ifx\csname E\endthing\endcsname\relax
! 398: \expandafter\ifx\csname \endthing\endcsname\relax
! 399: % There's no \foo, i.e., no ``environment'' foo.
! 400: \errhelp = \EMsimple
! 401: \errmessage{Undefined command `@end \endthing'}%
! 402: \else
! 403: \unmatchedenderror\endthing
! 404: \fi
! 405: \else
! 406: % Everything's ok; the right environment has been started.
! 407: \csname E\endthing\endcsname
! 408: \fi
! 409: }
! 410:
! 411: % There is an environment #1, but it hasn't been started. Give an error.
! 412: %
! 413: \def\unmatchedenderror#1{%
! 414: \errhelp = \EMsimple
! 415: \errmessage{This `@end #1' doesn't have a matching `@#1'}%
! 416: }
! 417:
! 418: % Define the control sequence \E#1 to give an unmatched @end error.
! 419: %
! 420: \def\defineunmatchedend#1{%
! 421: \expandafter\def\csname E#1\endcsname{\unmatchedenderror{#1}}%
! 422: }
! 423:
! 424:
! 425: % Single-spacing is done by various environments (specifically, in
! 426: % \nonfillstart and \quotations).
! 427: \newskip\singlespaceskip \singlespaceskip = 12.5pt
! 428: \def\singlespace{%
! 429: % Why was this kern here? It messes up equalizing space above and below
! 430: % environments. --karl, 6may93
! 431: %{\advance \baselineskip by -\singlespaceskip
! 432: %\kern \baselineskip}%
! 433: \setleading \singlespaceskip
! 434: }
! 435:
! 436: %% Simple single-character @ commands
! 437:
! 438: % @@ prints an @
! 439: % Kludge this until the fonts are right (grr).
! 440: \def\@{{\tt\char64}}
! 441:
! 442: % This is turned off because it was never documented
! 443: % and you can use @w{...} around a quote to suppress ligatures.
! 444: %% Define @` and @' to be the same as ` and '
! 445: %% but suppressing ligatures.
! 446: %\def\`{{`}}
! 447: %\def\'{{'}}
! 448:
! 449: % Used to generate quoted braces.
! 450: \def\mylbrace {{\tt\char123}}
! 451: \def\myrbrace {{\tt\char125}}
! 452: \let\{=\mylbrace
! 453: \let\}=\myrbrace
! 454: \begingroup
! 455: % Definitions to produce actual \{ & \} command in an index.
! 456: \catcode`\{ = 12 \catcode`\} = 12
! 457: \catcode`\[ = 1 \catcode`\] = 2
! 458: \catcode`\@ = 0 \catcode`\\ = 12
! 459: @gdef@lbracecmd[\{]%
! 460: @gdef@rbracecmd[\}]%
! 461: @endgroup
! 462:
! 463: % Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent
! 464: % Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @v @H.
! 465: \let\, = \c
! 466: \let\dotaccent = \.
! 467: \def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}}
! 468: \let\tieaccent = \t
! 469: \let\ubaraccent = \b
! 470: \let\udotaccent = \d
! 471:
! 472: % Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown
! 473: % Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (and lowercase versions) @ss.
! 474: \def\questiondown{?`}
! 475: \def\exclamdown{!`}
! 476:
! 477: % Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents.
! 478: \def\imacro{i}
! 479: \def\jmacro{j}
! 480: \def\dotless#1{%
! 481: \def\temp{#1}%
! 482: \ifx\temp\imacro \ptexi
! 483: \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \j
! 484: \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}%
! 485: \fi\fi
! 486: }
! 487:
! 488: % Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space
! 489: % equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space
! 490: % at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and
! 491: % since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the
! 492: % penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph.
! 493: {\catcode`@ = 11
! 494: % Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble
! 495: % if the definition is written into an index file.
! 496: \global\let\tiepenalty = \@M
! 497: \gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ }
! 498: }
! 499:
! 500: % @: forces normal size whitespace following.
! 501: \def\:{\spacefactor=1000 }
! 502:
! 503: % @* forces a line break.
! 504: \def\*{\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces}
! 505:
! 506: % @. is an end-of-sentence period.
! 507: \def\.{.\spacefactor=3000 }
! 508:
! 509: % @! is an end-of-sentence bang.
! 510: \def\!{!\spacefactor=3000 }
! 511:
! 512: % @? is an end-of-sentence query.
! 513: \def\?{?\spacefactor=3000 }
! 514:
! 515: % @w prevents a word break. Without the \leavevmode, @w at the
! 516: % beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would
! 517: % produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph.
! 518: \def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}}
! 519:
! 520: % @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing
! 521: % it in a TeX vbox. We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box
! 522: % to keep its height that of a normal line. According to the rules for
! 523: % \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is
! 524: % max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0). If that height is large,
! 525: % therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and
! 526: % the text is small, which looks bad.
! 527: %
! 528: \def\group{\begingroup
! 529: \ifnum\catcode13=\active \else
! 530: \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp
! 531: \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}%
! 532: \fi
! 533: %
! 534: % The \vtop we start below produces a box with normal height and large
! 535: % depth; thus, TeX puts \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the
! 536: % next line of text is done) \lineskip glue after it. (See p.82 of
! 537: % the TeXbook.) Thus, space below is not quite equal to space
! 538: % above. But it's pretty close.
! 539: \def\Egroup{%
! 540: \egroup % End the \vtop.
! 541: \endgroup % End the \group.
! 542: }%
! 543: %
! 544: \vtop\bgroup
! 545: % We have to put a strut on the last line in case the @group is in
! 546: % the midst of an example, rather than completely enclosing it.
! 547: % Otherwise, the interline space between the last line of the group
! 548: % and the first line afterwards is too small. But we can't put the
! 549: % strut in \Egroup, since there it would be on a line by itself.
! 550: % Hence this just inserts a strut at the beginning of each line.
! 551: \everypar = {\strut}%
! 552: %
! 553: % Since we have a strut on every line, we don't need any of TeX's
! 554: % normal interline spacing.
! 555: \offinterlineskip
! 556: %
! 557: % OK, but now we have to do something about blank
! 558: % lines in the input in @example-like environments, which normally
! 559: % just turn into \lisppar, which will insert no space now that we've
! 560: % turned off the interline space. Simplest is to make them be an
! 561: % empty paragraph.
! 562: \ifx\par\lisppar
! 563: \edef\par{\leavevmode \par}%
! 564: %
! 565: % Reset ^^M's definition to new definition of \par.
! 566: \obeylines
! 567: \fi
! 568: %
! 569: % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as
! 570: % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an
! 571: % end-of-line in the output. We don't want the end-of-line after
! 572: % the `@group' to put extra space in the output. Since @group
! 573: % should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo
! 574: % manual), we don't worry about eating any user text.
! 575: \comment
! 576: }
! 577: %
! 578: % TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help
! 579: % message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'.
! 580: %
! 581: \newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{%
! 582: group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J%
! 583: where each line of input produces a line of output.}
! 584:
! 585: % @need space-in-mils
! 586: % forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining.
! 587:
! 588: \newdimen\mil \mil=0.001in
! 589:
! 590: \def\need{\parsearg\needx}
! 591:
! 592: % Old definition--didn't work.
! 593: %\def\needx #1{\par %
! 594: %% This method tries to make TeX break the page naturally
! 595: %% if the depth of the box does not fit.
! 596: %{\baselineskip=0pt%
! 597: %\vtop to #1\mil{\vfil}\kern -#1\mil\nobreak
! 598: %\prevdepth=-1000pt
! 599: %}}
! 600:
! 601: \def\needx#1{%
! 602: % Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a
! 603: % paragraph.
! 604: \par
! 605: %
! 606: % If the @need value is less than one line space, it's useless.
! 607: \dimen0 = #1\mil
! 608: \dimen2 = \ht\strutbox
! 609: \advance\dimen2 by \dp\strutbox
! 610: \ifdim\dimen0 > \dimen2
! 611: %
! 612: % Do a \strut just to make the height of this box be normal, so the
! 613: % normal leading is inserted relative to the preceding line.
! 614: % And a page break here is fine.
! 615: \vtop to #1\mil{\strut\vfil}%
! 616: %
! 617: % TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the
! 618: % main vertical list is 10000 or more. But in order to see if the
! 619: % empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider
! 620: % page breaks. On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the
! 621: % page after the empty box. So we use a penalty of 9999.
! 622: %
! 623: % There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the
! 624: % page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in
! 625: % sight. (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which
! 626: % almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing
! 627: % good page breaking, for example.) However, I could not construct an
! 628: % example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real
! 629: % document, then we can reconsider our strategy.
! 630: \penalty9999
! 631: %
! 632: % Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not.
! 633: \kern -#1\mil
! 634: %
! 635: % Do not allow a page break right after this kern.
! 636: \nobreak
! 637: \fi
! 638: }
! 639:
! 640: % @br forces paragraph break
! 641:
! 642: \let\br = \par
! 643:
! 644: % @dots{} output an ellipsis using the current font.
! 645: % We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in a typewriter
! 646: % font as three actual period characters.
! 647: %
! 648: \def\dots{%
! 649: \leavevmode
! 650: \hbox to 1.5em{%
! 651: \hskip 0pt plus 0.25fil minus 0.25fil
! 652: .\hss.\hss.%
! 653: \hskip 0pt plus 0.5fil minus 0.5fil
! 654: }%
! 655: }
! 656:
! 657: % @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis.
! 658: %
! 659: \def\enddots{%
! 660: \leavevmode
! 661: \hbox to 2em{%
! 662: \hskip 0pt plus 0.25fil minus 0.25fil
! 663: .\hss.\hss.\hss.%
! 664: \hskip 0pt plus 0.5fil minus 0.5fil
! 665: }%
! 666: \spacefactor=3000
! 667: }
! 668:
! 669:
! 670: % @page forces the start of a new page
! 671: %
! 672: \def\page{\par\vfill\supereject}
! 673:
! 674: % @exdent text....
! 675: % outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin
! 676:
! 677: % This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment.
! 678: % That's how much \exdent should take out.
! 679: \newskip\exdentamount
! 680:
! 681: % This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun.
! 682: \def\exdent{\parsearg\exdentyyy}
! 683: \def\exdentyyy #1{{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}}
! 684:
! 685: % This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example.
! 686: \def\nofillexdent{\parsearg\nofillexdentyyy}
! 687: \def\nofillexdentyyy #1{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount
! 688: \leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}}
! 689:
! 690: % @inmargin{TEXT} puts TEXT in the margin next to the current paragraph.
! 691:
! 692: \def\inmargin#1{%
! 693: \strut\vadjust{\nobreak\kern-\strutdepth
! 694: \vtop to \strutdepth{\baselineskip\strutdepth\vss
! 695: \llap{\rightskip=\inmarginspacing \vbox{\noindent #1}}\null}}}
! 696: \newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm
! 697: \def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox}
! 698:
! 699: %\hbox{{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}}
! 700:
! 701: % @include file insert text of that file as input.
! 702: % Allow normal characters that we make active in the argument (a file name).
! 703: \def\include{\begingroup
! 704: \catcode`\\=12
! 705: \catcode`~=12
! 706: \catcode`^=12
! 707: \catcode`_=12
! 708: \catcode`|=12
! 709: \catcode`<=12
! 710: \catcode`>=12
! 711: \catcode`+=12
! 712: \parsearg\includezzz}
! 713: % Restore active chars for included file.
! 714: \def\includezzz#1{\endgroup\begingroup
! 715: % Read the included file in a group so nested @include's work.
! 716: \def\thisfile{#1}%
! 717: \input\thisfile
! 718: \endgroup}
! 719:
! 720: \def\thisfile{}
! 721:
! 722: % @center line outputs that line, centered
! 723:
! 724: \def\center{\parsearg\centerzzz}
! 725: \def\centerzzz #1{{\advance\hsize by -\leftskip
! 726: \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
! 727: \centerline{#1}}}
! 728:
! 729: % @sp n outputs n lines of vertical space
! 730:
! 731: \def\sp{\parsearg\spxxx}
! 732: \def\spxxx #1{\vskip #1\baselineskip}
! 733:
! 734: % @comment ...line which is ignored...
! 735: % @c is the same as @comment
! 736: % @ignore ... @end ignore is another way to write a comment
! 737:
! 738: \def\comment{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\other%
! 739: \catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other%
! 740: \commentxxx}
! 741: {\catcode`\^^M=\other \gdef\commentxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}}
! 742:
! 743: \let\c=\comment
! 744:
! 745: % @paragraphindent NCHARS
! 746: % We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough.
! 747: % We cannot implement @paragraphindent asis, though.
! 748: %
! 749: \def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords
! 750: \def\noneword{none}
! 751: %
! 752: \def\paragraphindent{\parsearg\doparagraphindent}
! 753: \def\doparagraphindent#1{%
! 754: \def\temp{#1}%
! 755: \ifx\temp\asisword
! 756: \else
! 757: \ifx\temp\noneword
! 758: \defaultparindent = 0pt
! 759: \else
! 760: \defaultparindent = #1em
! 761: \fi
! 762: \fi
! 763: \parindent = \defaultparindent
! 764: }
! 765:
! 766: % @exampleindent NCHARS
! 767: % We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent.
! 768: % It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but
! 769: % I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent.
! 770: \def\exampleindent{\parsearg\doexampleindent}
! 771: \def\doexampleindent#1{%
! 772: \def\temp{#1}%
! 773: \ifx\temp\asisword
! 774: \else
! 775: \ifx\temp\noneword
! 776: \lispnarrowing = 0pt
! 777: \else
! 778: \lispnarrowing = #1em
! 779: \fi
! 780: \fi
! 781: }
! 782:
! 783: % @asis just yields its argument. Used with @table, for example.
! 784: %
! 785: \def\asis#1{#1}
! 786:
! 787: % @math means output in math mode.
! 788: % We don't use $'s directly in the definition of \math because control
! 789: % sequences like \math are expanded when the toc file is written. Then,
! 790: % we read the toc file back, the $'s will be normal characters (as they
! 791: % should be, according to the definition of Texinfo). So we must use a
! 792: % control sequence to switch into and out of math mode.
! 793: %
! 794: % This isn't quite enough for @math to work properly in indices, but it
! 795: % seems unlikely it will ever be needed there.
! 796: %
! 797: \let\implicitmath = $
! 798: \def\math#1{\implicitmath #1\implicitmath}
! 799:
! 800: % @bullet and @minus need the same treatment as @math, just above.
! 801: \def\bullet{\implicitmath\ptexbullet\implicitmath}
! 802: \def\minus{\implicitmath-\implicitmath}
! 803:
! 804: % @refill is a no-op.
! 805: \let\refill=\relax
! 806:
! 807: % If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to
! 808: % be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs.
! 809: % This is done with @novalidate (before @setfilename).
! 810: %
! 811: \newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files.
! 812: \let\novalidate = \linksfalse
! 813:
! 814: % @setfilename is done at the beginning of every texinfo file.
! 815: % So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input.
! 816: % This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo.
! 817: \def\setfilename{%
! 818: \iflinks
! 819: \readauxfile
! 820: \fi % \openindices needs to do some work in any case.
! 821: \openindices
! 822: \fixbackslash % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'.
! 823: \global\let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds.
! 824: %
! 825: % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it.
! 826: % Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc.
! 827: % Just to be on the safe side, close the input stream before the \input.
! 828: \openin 1 texinfo.cnf
! 829: \ifeof1 \let\temp=\relax \else \def\temp{\input texinfo.cnf }\fi
! 830: \closein1
! 831: \temp
! 832: %
! 833: \comment % Ignore the actual filename.
! 834: }
! 835:
! 836: % Called from \setfilename.
! 837: %
! 838: \def\openindices{%
! 839: \newindex{cp}%
! 840: \newcodeindex{fn}%
! 841: \newcodeindex{vr}%
! 842: \newcodeindex{tp}%
! 843: \newcodeindex{ky}%
! 844: \newcodeindex{pg}%
! 845: }
! 846:
! 847: % @bye.
! 848: \outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend}
! 849:
! 850:
! 851: \message{pdf,}
! 852: % adobe `portable' document format
! 853: \newcount\tempnum
! 854: \newcount\lnkcount
! 855: \newtoks\filename
! 856: \newcount\filenamelength
! 857: \newcount\pgn
! 858: \newtoks\toksA
! 859: \newtoks\toksB
! 860: \newtoks\toksC
! 861: \newtoks\toksD
! 862: \newbox\boxA
! 863: \newcount\countA
! 864: \newif\ifpdf
! 865: \newif\ifpdfmakepagedest
! 866:
! 867: \ifx\pdfoutput\undefined
! 868: \pdffalse
! 869: \let\pdfmkdest = \gobble
! 870: \let\pdfurl = \gobble
! 871: \let\endlink = \relax
! 872: \let\linkcolor = \relax
! 873: \let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax
! 874: \else
! 875: \pdftrue
! 876: \pdfoutput = 1
! 877: \input pdfcolor
! 878: \def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{%
! 879: \def\imagewidth{#2}%
! 880: \def\imageheight{#3}%
! 881: \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
! 882: \pdfimage
! 883: \else
! 884: \pdfximage
! 885: \fi
! 886: \ifx\empty\imagewidth\else width \imagewidth \fi
! 887: \ifx\empty\imageheight\else height \imageheight \fi
! 888: {#1.pdf}%
! 889: \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else
! 890: \pdfrefximage \pdflastximage
! 891: \fi}
! 892: \def\pdfmkdest#1{\pdfdest name{#1@} xyz}
! 893: \def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1@}
! 894: \let\linkcolor = \Cyan
! 895: \def\endlink{\Black\pdfendlink}
! 896: % Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines
! 897: % come from Petr Olsak
! 898: \def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0%
! 899: \else \csname#1\endcsname \fi}
! 900: \def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=\expnumber{#1}\relax
! 901: \advance\tempnum by1
! 902: \expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}}
! 903: \def\pdfmakeoutlines{{%
! 904: \openin 1 \jobname.toc
! 905: \ifeof 1\else\bgroup
! 906: \closein 1
! 907: \indexnofonts
! 908: \def\tt{}
! 909: % thanh's hack / proper braces in bookmarks
! 910: \edef\mylbrace{\iftrue \string{\else}\fi}\let\{=\mylbrace
! 911: \edef\myrbrace{\iffalse{\else\string}\fi}\let\}=\myrbrace
! 912: %
! 913: \def\chapentry ##1##2##3{}
! 914: \def\unnumbchapentry ##1##2{}
! 915: \def\secentry ##1##2##3##4{\advancenumber{chap##2}}
! 916: \def\unnumbsecentry ##1##2{}
! 917: \def\subsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{\advancenumber{sec##2.##3}}
! 918: \def\unnumbsubsecentry ##1##2{}
! 919: \def\subsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5##6{\advancenumber{subsec##2.##3.##4}}
! 920: \def\unnumbsubsubsecentry ##1##2{}
! 921: \input \jobname.toc
! 922: \def\chapentry ##1##2##3{%
! 923: \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##3}}count-\expnumber{chap##2}{##1}}
! 924: \def\unnumbchapentry ##1##2{%
! 925: \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##2}}{##1}}
! 926: \def\secentry ##1##2##3##4{%
! 927: \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##4}}count-\expnumber{sec##2.##3}{##1}}
! 928: \def\unnumbsecentry ##1##2{%
! 929: \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##2}}{##1}}
! 930: \def\subsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{%
! 931: \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##5}}count-\expnumber{subsec##2.##3.##4}{##1}}
! 932: \def\unnumbsubsecentry ##1##2{%
! 933: \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##2}}{##1}}
! 934: \def\subsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5##6{%
! 935: \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##6}}{##1}}
! 936: \def\unnumbsubsubsecentry ##1##2{%
! 937: \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##2}}{##1}}
! 938: \input \jobname.toc
! 939: \egroup\fi
! 940: }}
! 941: \def\makelinks #1,{%
! 942: \def\params{#1}\def\E{END}%
! 943: \ifx\params\E
! 944: \let\nextmakelinks=\relax
! 945: \else
! 946: \let\nextmakelinks=\makelinks
! 947: \ifnum\lnkcount>0,\fi
! 948: \picknum{#1}%
! 949: \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}
! 950: goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\the\pgn}}%
! 951: \linkcolor #1%
! 952: \advance\lnkcount by 1%
! 953: \endlink
! 954: \fi
! 955: \nextmakelinks
! 956: }
! 957: \def\picknum#1{\expandafter\pn#1}
! 958: \def\pn#1{%
! 959: \def\p{#1}%
! 960: \ifx\p\lbrace
! 961: \let\nextpn=\ppn
! 962: \else
! 963: \let\nextpn=\ppnn
! 964: \def\first{#1}
! 965: \fi
! 966: \nextpn
! 967: }
! 968: \def\ppn#1{\pgn=#1\gobble}
! 969: \def\ppnn{\pgn=\first}
! 970: \def\pdfmklnk#1{\lnkcount=0\makelinks #1,END,}
! 971: \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks}
! 972: \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}%
! 973: \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax
! 974: \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces
! 975: \ifx\p\space\else\addtokens{\filename}{\PP}%
! 976: \advance\filenamelength by 1
! 977: \fi
! 978: \fi
! 979: \nextsp}
! 980: \def\getfilename#1{\filenamelength=0\expandafter\skipspaces#1|\relax}
! 981: \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
! 982: \let \startlink \pdfannotlink
! 983: \else
! 984: \let \startlink \pdfstartlink
! 985: \fi
! 986: \def\pdfurl#1{%
! 987: \begingroup
! 988: \normalturnoffactive\def\@{@}%
! 989: \leavevmode\Red
! 990: \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
! 991: user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}%
! 992: % #1
! 993: \endgroup}
! 994: \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}}
! 995: \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks}
! 996: \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks}
! 997: \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}}
! 998: \def\maketoks{%
! 999: \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|
! 1000: \ifx\first0\adn0
! 1001: \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3
! 1002: \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6
! 1003: \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9
! 1004: \else
! 1005: \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi
! 1006: \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else
! 1007: \let\next=\maketoks
! 1008: \addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD}
! 1009: \ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi
! 1010: \fi
! 1011: \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
! 1012: \next}
! 1013: \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}%
! 1014: {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0}
! 1015: \def\pdflink#1{%
! 1016: \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\mkpgn{#1}}
! 1017: \linkcolor #1\endlink}
! 1018: \def\mkpgn#1{#1@}
! 1019: \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st}
! 1020: \fi % \ifx\pdfoutput
! 1021:
! 1022:
! 1023: \message{fonts,}
! 1024: % Font-change commands.
! 1025:
! 1026: % Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not.
! 1027: % So we set up a \sf analogous to plain's \rm, etc.
! 1028: \newfam\sffam
! 1029: \def\sf{\fam=\sffam \tensf}
! 1030: \let\li = \sf % Sometimes we call it \li, not \sf.
! 1031:
! 1032: % We don't need math for this one.
! 1033: \def\ttsl{\tenttsl}
! 1034:
! 1035: % Use Computer Modern fonts at \magstephalf (11pt).
! 1036: \newcount\mainmagstep
! 1037: \mainmagstep=\magstephalf
! 1038:
! 1039: % Set the font macro #1 to the font named #2, adding on the
! 1040: % specified font prefix (normally `cm').
! 1041: % #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor
! 1042: \def\setfont#1#2#3#4{\font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4}
! 1043:
! 1044: % Use cm as the default font prefix.
! 1045: % To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix
! 1046: % before you read in texinfo.tex.
! 1047: \ifx\fontprefix\undefined
! 1048: \def\fontprefix{cm}
! 1049: \fi
! 1050: % Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM.
! 1051: \def\rmshape{r}
! 1052: \def\rmbshape{bx} %where the normal face is bold
! 1053: \def\bfshape{b}
! 1054: \def\bxshape{bx}
! 1055: \def\ttshape{tt}
! 1056: \def\ttbshape{tt}
! 1057: \def\ttslshape{sltt}
! 1058: \def\itshape{ti}
! 1059: \def\itbshape{bxti}
! 1060: \def\slshape{sl}
! 1061: \def\slbshape{bxsl}
! 1062: \def\sfshape{ss}
! 1063: \def\sfbshape{ss}
! 1064: \def\scshape{csc}
! 1065: \def\scbshape{csc}
! 1066:
! 1067: \ifx\bigger\relax
! 1068: \let\mainmagstep=\magstep1
! 1069: \setfont\textrm\rmshape{12}{1000}
! 1070: \setfont\texttt\ttshape{12}{1000}
! 1071: \else
! 1072: \setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
! 1073: \setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
! 1074: \fi
! 1075: % Instead of cmb10, you many want to use cmbx10.
! 1076: % cmbx10 is a prettier font on its own, but cmb10
! 1077: % looks better when embedded in a line with cmr10.
! 1078: \setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
! 1079: \setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
! 1080: \setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
! 1081: \setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
! 1082: \setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
! 1083: \setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
! 1084: \font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
! 1085: \font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
! 1086:
! 1087: % A few fonts for @defun, etc.
! 1088: \setfont\defbf\bxshape{10}{\magstep1} %was 1314
! 1089: \setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}
! 1090: \def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \bf}
! 1091:
! 1092: % Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt).
! 1093: \setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}
! 1094: \setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}
! 1095: \setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}
! 1096: \setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}
! 1097: \setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}
! 1098: \setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}
! 1099: \setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}
! 1100: \setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}
! 1101: \font\smalli=cmmi9
! 1102: \font\smallsy=cmsy9
! 1103:
! 1104: % Fonts for title page:
! 1105: \setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}
! 1106: \setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}
! 1107: \setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}
! 1108: \setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}
! 1109: \setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}
! 1110: \setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}
! 1111: \let\titlebf=\titlerm
! 1112: \setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}
! 1113: \font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3
! 1114: \font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4
! 1115: \def\authorrm{\secrm}
! 1116:
! 1117: % Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt).
! 1118: \setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}
! 1119: \setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}
! 1120: \setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}
! 1121: \setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2}
! 1122: \setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3}
! 1123: \setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000}
! 1124: \let\chapbf=\chaprm
! 1125: \setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3}
! 1126: \font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2
! 1127: \font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3
! 1128:
! 1129: % Section fonts (14.4pt).
! 1130: \setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}
! 1131: \setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}
! 1132: \setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}
! 1133: \setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}
! 1134: \setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}
! 1135: \setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}
! 1136: \let\secbf\secrm
! 1137: \setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}
! 1138: \font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1
! 1139: \font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
! 1140:
! 1141: % \setfont\ssecrm\bxshape{10}{\magstep1} % This size an font looked bad.
! 1142: % \setfont\ssecit\itshape{10}{\magstep1} % The letters were too crowded.
! 1143: % \setfont\ssecsl\slshape{10}{\magstep1}
! 1144: % \setfont\ssectt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}
! 1145: % \setfont\ssecsf\sfshape{10}{\magstep1}
! 1146:
! 1147: %\setfont\ssecrm\bfshape{10}{1315} % Note the use of cmb rather than cmbx.
! 1148: %\setfont\ssecit\itshape{10}{1315} % Also, the size is a little larger than
! 1149: %\setfont\ssecsl\slshape{10}{1315} % being scaled magstep1.
! 1150: %\setfont\ssectt\ttshape{10}{1315}
! 1151: %\setfont\ssecsf\sfshape{10}{1315}
! 1152:
! 1153: %\let\ssecbf=\ssecrm
! 1154:
! 1155: % Subsection fonts (13.15pt).
! 1156: \setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
! 1157: \setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}
! 1158: \setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}
! 1159: \setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
! 1160: \setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}
! 1161: \setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
! 1162: \let\ssecbf\ssecrm
! 1163: \setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1}
! 1164: \font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf
! 1165: \font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315
! 1166: % The smallcaps and symbol fonts should actually be scaled \magstep1.5,
! 1167: % but that is not a standard magnification.
! 1168:
! 1169: % In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters,
! 1170: % we have to define the \textfont of the standard families. Since
! 1171: % texinfo doesn't allow for producing subscripts and superscripts, we
! 1172: % don't bother to reset \scriptfont and \scriptscriptfont (which would
! 1173: % also require loading a lot more fonts).
! 1174: %
! 1175: \def\resetmathfonts{%
! 1176: \textfont0 = \tenrm \textfont1 = \teni \textfont2 = \tensy
! 1177: \textfont\itfam = \tenit \textfont\slfam = \tensl \textfont\bffam = \tenbf
! 1178: \textfont\ttfam = \tentt \textfont\sffam = \tensf
! 1179: }
! 1180:
! 1181:
! 1182: % The font-changing commands redefine the meanings of \tenSTYLE, instead
! 1183: % of just \STYLE. We do this so that font changes will continue to work
! 1184: % in math mode, where it is the current \fam that is relevant in most
! 1185: % cases, not the current font. Plain TeX does \def\bf{\fam=\bffam
! 1186: % \tenbf}, for example. By redefining \tenbf, we obviate the need to
! 1187: % redefine \bf itself.
! 1188: \def\textfonts{%
! 1189: \let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl
! 1190: \let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc
! 1191: \let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy \let\tenttsl=\textttsl
! 1192: \resetmathfonts}
! 1193: \def\titlefonts{%
! 1194: \let\tenrm=\titlerm \let\tenit=\titleit \let\tensl=\titlesl
! 1195: \let\tenbf=\titlebf \let\tentt=\titlett \let\smallcaps=\titlesc
! 1196: \let\tensf=\titlesf \let\teni=\titlei \let\tensy=\titlesy
! 1197: \let\tenttsl=\titlettsl
! 1198: \resetmathfonts \setleading{25pt}}
! 1199: \def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rm #1}}
! 1200: \def\chapfonts{%
! 1201: \let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl
! 1202: \let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc
! 1203: \let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy \let\tenttsl=\chapttsl
! 1204: \resetmathfonts \setleading{19pt}}
! 1205: \def\secfonts{%
! 1206: \let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl
! 1207: \let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc
! 1208: \let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy \let\tenttsl=\secttsl
! 1209: \resetmathfonts \setleading{16pt}}
! 1210: \def\subsecfonts{%
! 1211: \let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl
! 1212: \let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc
! 1213: \let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy \let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl
! 1214: \resetmathfonts \setleading{15pt}}
! 1215: \let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts % Maybe make sssec fonts scaled magstephalf?
! 1216: \def\smallfonts{%
! 1217: \let\tenrm=\smallrm \let\tenit=\smallit \let\tensl=\smallsl
! 1218: \let\tenbf=\smallbf \let\tentt=\smalltt \let\smallcaps=\smallsc
! 1219: \let\tensf=\smallsf \let\teni=\smalli \let\tensy=\smallsy
! 1220: \let\tenttsl=\smallttsl
! 1221: \resetmathfonts \setleading{11pt}}
! 1222:
! 1223: % Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes.
! 1224: %
! 1225: \textfonts
! 1226:
! 1227: % Define these so they can be easily changed for other fonts.
! 1228: \def\angleleft{$\langle$}
! 1229: \def\angleright{$\rangle$}
! 1230:
! 1231: % Count depth in font-changes, for error checks
! 1232: \newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0
! 1233:
! 1234: % Fonts for short table of contents.
! 1235: \setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}
! 1236: \setfont\shortcontbf\bxshape{12}{1000}
! 1237: \setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}
! 1238:
! 1239: %% Add scribe-like font environments, plus @l for inline lisp (usually sans
! 1240: %% serif) and @ii for TeX italic
! 1241:
! 1242: % \smartitalic{ARG} outputs arg in italics, followed by an italic correction
! 1243: % unless the following character is such as not to need one.
! 1244: \def\smartitalicx{\ifx\next,\else\ifx\next-\else\ifx\next.\else\/\fi\fi\fi}
! 1245: \def\smartslanted#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
! 1246: \def\smartitalic#1{{\it #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
! 1247:
! 1248: \let\i=\smartitalic
! 1249: \let\var=\smartslanted
! 1250: \let\dfn=\smartslanted
! 1251: \let\emph=\smartitalic
! 1252: \let\cite=\smartslanted
! 1253:
! 1254: \def\b#1{{\bf #1}}
! 1255: \let\strong=\b
! 1256:
! 1257: % We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at
! 1258: % the end of a paragraph. Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the
! 1259: % group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called.
! 1260: %
! 1261: \def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1 \aftergroup\restorehyphenation}
! 1262: \def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- }
! 1263:
! 1264: \def\t#1{%
! 1265: {\tt \rawbackslash \frenchspacing #1}%
! 1266: \null
! 1267: }
! 1268: \let\ttfont=\t
! 1269: \def\samp#1{`\tclose{#1}'\null}
! 1270: \setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000}
! 1271: \font\keysy=cmsy9
! 1272: \def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{%
! 1273: \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{%
! 1274: \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt
! 1275: \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}%
! 1276: \kern-0.4pt\hrule}%
! 1277: \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}}
! 1278: % The old definition, with no lozenge:
! 1279: %\def\key #1{{\ttsl \nohyphenation \uppercase{#1}}\null}
! 1280: \def\ctrl #1{{\tt \rawbackslash \hat}#1}
! 1281:
! 1282: % @file, @option are the same as @samp.
! 1283: \let\file=\samp
! 1284: \let\option=\samp
! 1285:
! 1286: % @code is a modification of @t,
! 1287: % which makes spaces the same size as normal in the surrounding text.
! 1288: \def\tclose#1{%
! 1289: {%
! 1290: % Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font.
! 1291: \spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font
! 1292: %
! 1293: % Switch to typewriter.
! 1294: \tt
! 1295: %
! 1296: % But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space.
! 1297: \def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}%
! 1298: %
! 1299: % Turn off hyphenation.
! 1300: \nohyphenation
! 1301: %
! 1302: \rawbackslash
! 1303: \frenchspacing
! 1304: #1%
! 1305: }%
! 1306: \null
! 1307: }
! 1308:
! 1309: % We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in \code.
! 1310: % Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes
! 1311: % in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc.
! 1312:
! 1313: % Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control
! 1314: % both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words.
! 1315: % We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that)
! 1316: % and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash.
! 1317: % -- rms.
! 1318: {
! 1319: \catcode`\-=\active
! 1320: \catcode`\_=\active
! 1321: %
! 1322: \global\def\code{\begingroup
! 1323: \catcode`\-=\active \let-\codedash
! 1324: \catcode`\_=\active \let_\codeunder
! 1325: \codex
! 1326: }
! 1327: %
! 1328: % If we end up with any active - characters when handling the index,
! 1329: % just treat them as a normal -.
! 1330: \global\def\indexbreaks{\catcode`\-=\active \let-\realdash}
! 1331: }
! 1332:
! 1333: \def\realdash{-}
! 1334: \def\codedash{-\discretionary{}{}{}}
! 1335: \def\codeunder{\ifusingtt{\normalunderscore\discretionary{}{}{}}{\_}}
! 1336: \def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup}
! 1337:
! 1338: %\let\exp=\tclose %Was temporary
! 1339:
! 1340: % @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command,
! 1341: % then @kbd has no effect.
! 1342:
! 1343: % @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always),
! 1344: % `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends),
! 1345: % or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always).
! 1346: \def\kbdinputstyle{\parsearg\kbdinputstylexxx}
! 1347: \def\kbdinputstylexxx#1{%
! 1348: \def\arg{#1}%
! 1349: \ifx\arg\worddistinct
! 1350: \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}%
! 1351: \else\ifx\arg\wordexample
! 1352: \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
! 1353: \else\ifx\arg\wordcode
! 1354: \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
! 1355: \fi\fi\fi
! 1356: }
! 1357: \def\worddistinct{distinct}
! 1358: \def\wordexample{example}
! 1359: \def\wordcode{code}
! 1360:
! 1361: % Default is kbdinputdistinct. (Too much of a hassle to call the macro,
! 1362: % the catcodes are wrong for parsearg to work.)
! 1363: \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}
! 1364:
! 1365: \def\xkey{\key}
! 1366: \def\kbdfoo#1#2#3\par{\def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}%
! 1367: \ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}%
! 1368: \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi
! 1369: \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi}
! 1370:
! 1371: % For @url, @env, @command quotes seem unnecessary, so use \code.
! 1372: \let\url=\code
! 1373: \let\env=\code
! 1374: \let\command=\code
! 1375:
! 1376: % @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') takes an optional (comma-separated)
! 1377: % second argument specifying the text to display and an optional third
! 1378: % arg as text to display instead of (rather than in addition to) the url
! 1379: % itself. First (mandatory) arg is the url. Perhaps eventually put in
! 1380: % a hypertex \special here.
! 1381: %
! 1382: \def\uref#1{\douref #1,,,\finish}
! 1383: \def\douref#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{\begingroup
! 1384: \unsepspaces
! 1385: \pdfurl{#1}%
! 1386: \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
! 1387: \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
! 1388: \unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that
! 1389: \else
! 1390: \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
! 1391: \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
! 1392: \ifpdf
! 1393: \unhbox0 % PDF: 2nd arg given, show only it
! 1394: \else
! 1395: \unhbox0\ (\code{#1})% DVI: 2nd arg given, show both it and url
! 1396: \fi
! 1397: \else
! 1398: \code{#1}% only url given, so show it
! 1399: \fi
! 1400: \fi
! 1401: \endlink
! 1402: \endgroup}
! 1403:
! 1404: % rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97.
! 1405: % So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf.
! 1406: %
! 1407: %\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright}
! 1408: \ifpdf
! 1409: \def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish}
! 1410: \def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup
! 1411: \unsepspaces
! 1412: \pdfurl{mailto:#1}%
! 1413: \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
! 1414: \ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi
! 1415: \endlink
! 1416: \endgroup}
! 1417: \else
! 1418: \let\email=\uref
! 1419: \fi
! 1420:
! 1421: % Check if we are currently using a typewriter font. Since all the
! 1422: % Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and
! 1423: % shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have
! 1424: % this property, we can check that font parameter.
! 1425: %
! 1426: \def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt }
! 1427:
! 1428: % Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'. The only reason for the
! 1429: % argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt.
! 1430: %
! 1431: \def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1}
! 1432:
! 1433: \def\kbd#1{\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdfoo\look??\par}
! 1434:
! 1435: % @l was never documented to mean ``switch to the Lisp font'',
! 1436: % and it is not used as such in any manual I can find. We need it for
! 1437: % Polish suppressed-l. --karl, 22sep96.
! 1438: %\def\l#1{{\li #1}\null}
! 1439:
! 1440: % Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii.
! 1441: \def\r#1{{\rm #1}} % roman font
! 1442: \def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}} % smallcaps font
! 1443: \def\ii#1{{\it #1}} % italic font
! 1444:
! 1445: % @acronym downcases the argument and prints in smallcaps.
! 1446: \def\acronym#1{{\smallcaps \lowercase{#1}}}
! 1447:
! 1448: % @pounds{} is a sterling sign.
! 1449: \def\pounds{{\it\$}}
! 1450:
! 1451:
! 1452: \message{page headings,}
! 1453:
! 1454: \newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in
! 1455: \newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc
! 1456:
! 1457: % First the title page. Must do @settitle before @titlepage.
! 1458: \newif\ifseenauthor
! 1459: \newif\iffinishedtitlepage
! 1460:
! 1461: % Do an implicit @contents or @shortcontents after @end titlepage if the
! 1462: % user says @setcontentsaftertitlepage or @setshortcontentsaftertitlepage.
! 1463: %
! 1464: \newif\ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
! 1465: \let\setcontentsaftertitlepage = \setcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
! 1466: \newif\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
! 1467: \let\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage = \setshortcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
! 1468:
! 1469: \def\shorttitlepage{\parsearg\shorttitlepagezzz}
! 1470: \def\shorttitlepagezzz #1{\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}%
! 1471: \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page}
! 1472:
! 1473: \def\titlepage{\begingroup \parindent=0pt \textfonts
! 1474: \let\subtitlerm=\tenrm
! 1475: \def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines}%
! 1476: %
! 1477: \def\authorfont{\authorrm \normalbaselineskip = 16pt \normalbaselines}%
! 1478: %
! 1479: % Leave some space at the very top of the page.
! 1480: \vglue\titlepagetopglue
! 1481: %
! 1482: % Now you can print the title using @title.
! 1483: \def\title{\parsearg\titlezzz}%
! 1484: \def\titlezzz##1{\leftline{\titlefonts\rm ##1}
! 1485: % print a rule at the page bottom also.
! 1486: \finishedtitlepagefalse
! 1487: \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt}%
! 1488: % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title.
! 1489: \finishedtitlepagetrue
! 1490: %
! 1491: % Now you can put text using @subtitle.
! 1492: \def\subtitle{\parsearg\subtitlezzz}%
! 1493: \def\subtitlezzz##1{{\subtitlefont \rightline{##1}}}%
! 1494: %
! 1495: % @author should come last, but may come many times.
! 1496: \def\author{\parsearg\authorzzz}%
! 1497: \def\authorzzz##1{\ifseenauthor\else\vskip 0pt plus 1filll\seenauthortrue\fi
! 1498: {\authorfont \leftline{##1}}}%
! 1499: %
! 1500: % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space
! 1501: % at the top of the second. We don't want the ragged left on the second.
! 1502: \let\oldpage = \page
! 1503: \def\page{%
! 1504: \iffinishedtitlepage\else
! 1505: \finishtitlepage
! 1506: \fi
! 1507: \oldpage
! 1508: \let\page = \oldpage
! 1509: \hbox{}}%
! 1510: % \def\page{\oldpage \hbox{}}
! 1511: }
! 1512:
! 1513: \def\Etitlepage{%
! 1514: \iffinishedtitlepage\else
! 1515: \finishtitlepage
! 1516: \fi
! 1517: % It is important to do the page break before ending the group,
! 1518: % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group.
! 1519: % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page
! 1520: % after the title page, which we certainly don't want.
! 1521: \oldpage
! 1522: \endgroup
! 1523: %
! 1524: % If they want short, they certainly want long too.
! 1525: \ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
! 1526: \shortcontents
! 1527: \contents
! 1528: \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
! 1529: \global\let\contents = \relax
! 1530: \fi
! 1531: %
! 1532: \ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
! 1533: \contents
! 1534: \global\let\contents = \relax
! 1535: \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
! 1536: \fi
! 1537: %
! 1538: \ifpdf \pdfmakepagedesttrue \fi
! 1539: %
! 1540: \HEADINGSon
! 1541: }
! 1542:
! 1543: \def\finishtitlepage{%
! 1544: \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize
! 1545: \vskip\titlepagebottomglue
! 1546: \finishedtitlepagetrue
! 1547: }
! 1548:
! 1549: %%% Set up page headings and footings.
! 1550:
! 1551: \let\thispage=\folio
! 1552:
! 1553: \newtoks\evenheadline % headline on even pages
! 1554: \newtoks\oddheadline % headline on odd pages
! 1555: \newtoks\evenfootline % footline on even pages
! 1556: \newtoks\oddfootline % footline on odd pages
! 1557:
! 1558: % Now make Tex use those variables
! 1559: \headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline
! 1560: \else \the\evenheadline \fi}}
! 1561: \footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline
! 1562: \else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook}
! 1563: \let\HEADINGShook=\relax
! 1564:
! 1565: % Commands to set those variables.
! 1566: % For example, this is what @headings on does
! 1567: % @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter
! 1568: % @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle
! 1569: % @evenfooting @thisfile||
! 1570: % @oddfooting ||@thisfile
! 1571:
! 1572: \def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx}
! 1573: \def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx}
! 1574: \def\everyheading{\parsearg\everyheadingxxx}
! 1575:
! 1576: \def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx}
! 1577: \def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx}
! 1578: \def\everyfooting{\parsearg\everyfootingxxx}
! 1579:
! 1580: {\catcode`\@=0 %
! 1581:
! 1582: \gdef\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
! 1583: \gdef\evenheadingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
! 1584: \global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
! 1585:
! 1586: \gdef\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
! 1587: \gdef\oddheadingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
! 1588: \global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
! 1589:
! 1590: \gdef\everyheadingxxx#1{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}%
! 1591:
! 1592: \gdef\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
! 1593: \gdef\evenfootingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
! 1594: \global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
! 1595:
! 1596: \gdef\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
! 1597: \gdef\oddfootingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
! 1598: \global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}%
! 1599: %
! 1600: % Leave some space for the footline. Hopefully ok to assume
! 1601: % @evenfooting will not be used by itself.
! 1602: \global\advance\pageheight by -\baselineskip
! 1603: \global\advance\vsize by -\baselineskip
! 1604: }
! 1605:
! 1606: \gdef\everyfootingxxx#1{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}}
! 1607: %
! 1608: }% unbind the catcode of @.
! 1609:
! 1610: % @headings double turns headings on for double-sided printing.
! 1611: % @headings single turns headings on for single-sided printing.
! 1612: % @headings off turns them off.
! 1613: % @headings on same as @headings double, retained for compatibility.
! 1614: % @headings after turns on double-sided headings after this page.
! 1615: % @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page.
! 1616: % @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page.
! 1617: % By default, they are off at the start of a document,
! 1618: % and turned `on' after @end titlepage.
! 1619:
! 1620: \def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname}
! 1621:
! 1622: \def\HEADINGSoff{
! 1623: \global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
! 1624: \global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}}
! 1625: \HEADINGSoff
! 1626: % When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1.
! 1627: % For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner,
! 1628: % chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document
! 1629: % title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top
! 1630: % edge of all pages.
! 1631: \def\HEADINGSdouble{
! 1632: \global\pageno=1
! 1633: \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
! 1634: \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
! 1635: \global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
! 1636: \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
! 1637: \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
! 1638: }
! 1639: \let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
! 1640:
! 1641: % For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page,
! 1642: % page number on top right.
! 1643: \def\HEADINGSsingle{
! 1644: \global\pageno=1
! 1645: \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
! 1646: \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
! 1647: \global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
! 1648: \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
! 1649: \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
! 1650: }
! 1651: \def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}
! 1652:
! 1653: \def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex}
! 1654: \let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter
! 1655: \def\HEADINGSdoublex{%
! 1656: \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
! 1657: \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
! 1658: \global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
! 1659: \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
! 1660: \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
! 1661: }
! 1662:
! 1663: \def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex}
! 1664: \def\HEADINGSsinglex{%
! 1665: \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
! 1666: \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
! 1667: \global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
! 1668: \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
! 1669: \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
! 1670: }
! 1671:
! 1672: % Subroutines used in generating headings
! 1673: % Produces Day Month Year style of output.
! 1674: \def\today{%
! 1675: \number\day\space
! 1676: \ifcase\month
! 1677: \or\putwordMJan\or\putwordMFeb\or\putwordMMar\or\putwordMApr
! 1678: \or\putwordMMay\or\putwordMJun\or\putwordMJul\or\putwordMAug
! 1679: \or\putwordMSep\or\putwordMOct\or\putwordMNov\or\putwordMDec
! 1680: \fi
! 1681: \space\number\year}
! 1682:
! 1683: % @settitle line... specifies the title of the document, for headings.
! 1684: % It generates no output of its own.
! 1685: \def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle}
! 1686: \def\settitle{\parsearg\settitlezzz}
! 1687: \def\settitlezzz #1{\gdef\thistitle{#1}}
! 1688:
! 1689:
! 1690: \message{tables,}
! 1691: % Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x), @kitem(x), @xitem(x).
! 1692:
! 1693: % default indentation of table text
! 1694: \newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in
! 1695: % default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text
! 1696: \newdimen\itemindent \itemindent=.3in
! 1697: % margin between end of table item and start of table text.
! 1698: \newdimen\itemmargin \itemmargin=.1in
! 1699:
! 1700: % used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin
! 1701: \newdimen\itemmax
! 1702:
! 1703: % Note @table, @vtable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with
! 1704: % these defs.
! 1705: % They also define \itemindex
! 1706: % to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none).
! 1707:
! 1708: \newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip
! 1709:
! 1710: \def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi}
! 1711:
! 1712: \def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz}
! 1713: \def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz}
! 1714:
! 1715: \def\internalBxitem "#1"{\def\xitemsubtopix{#1} \smallbreak \parsearg\xitemzzz}
! 1716: \def\internalBxitemx "#1"{\def\xitemsubtopix{#1} \itemxpar \parsearg\xitemzzz}
! 1717:
! 1718: \def\internalBkitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\kitemzzz}
! 1719: \def\internalBkitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\kitemzzz}
! 1720:
! 1721: \def\kitemzzz #1{\dosubind {kw}{\code{#1}}{for {\bf \lastfunction}}%
! 1722: \itemzzz {#1}}
! 1723:
! 1724: \def\xitemzzz #1{\dosubind {kw}{\code{#1}}{for {\bf \xitemsubtopic}}%
! 1725: \itemzzz {#1}}
! 1726:
! 1727: \def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup %
! 1728: \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
! 1729: \advance\hsize by -\tableindent
! 1730: \setbox0=\hbox{\itemfont{#1}}%
! 1731: \itemindex{#1}%
! 1732: \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx.
! 1733: %
! 1734: % If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line
! 1735: % by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that
! 1736: % line. We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next
! 1737: % command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the
! 1738: % horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space.
! 1739: \ifdim \wd0>\itemmax
! 1740: %
! 1741: % Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping,
! 1742: % but leave it ragged-right.
! 1743: \begingroup
! 1744: \advance\leftskip by-\tableindent
! 1745: \advance\hsize by\tableindent
! 1746: \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil
! 1747: \leavevmode\unhbox0\par
! 1748: \endgroup
! 1749: %
! 1750: % We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the
! 1751: % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started.
! 1752: \nobreak \vskip-\parskip
! 1753: %
! 1754: % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up. Unfortunately
! 1755: % we can't prevent a possible page break at the following
! 1756: % \baselineskip glue.
! 1757: \nobreak
! 1758: \endgroup
! 1759: \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse
! 1760: \else
! 1761: % The item text fits into the space. Start a paragraph, so that the
! 1762: % following text (if any) will end up on the same line.
! 1763: \noindent
! 1764: % Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in
! 1765: % the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and
! 1766: % eventually be printed.
! 1767: \nobreak\kern-\tableindent
! 1768: \dimen0 = \itemmax \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0
! 1769: \unhbox0
! 1770: \nobreak\kern\dimen0
! 1771: \endgroup
! 1772: \itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue
! 1773: \fi
! 1774: }
! 1775:
! 1776: \def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a table}}
! 1777: \def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a table}}
! 1778: \def\kitem{\errmessage{@kitem while not in a table}}
! 1779: \def\kitemx{\errmessage{@kitemx while not in a table}}
! 1780: \def\xitem{\errmessage{@xitem while not in a table}}
! 1781: \def\xitemx{\errmessage{@xitemx while not in a table}}
! 1782:
! 1783: % Contains a kludge to get @end[description] to work.
! 1784: \def\description{\tablez{\dontindex}{1}{}{}{}{}}
! 1785:
! 1786: % @table, @ftable, @vtable.
! 1787: \def\table{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\tablex}
! 1788: {\obeylines\obeyspaces%
! 1789: \gdef\tablex #1^^M{%
! 1790: \tabley\dontindex#1 \endtabley}}
! 1791:
! 1792: \def\ftable{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\ftablex}
! 1793: {\obeylines\obeyspaces%
! 1794: \gdef\ftablex #1^^M{%
! 1795: \tabley\fnitemindex#1 \endtabley
! 1796: \def\Eftable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
! 1797: \let\Etable=\relax}}
! 1798:
! 1799: \def\vtable{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\vtablex}
! 1800: {\obeylines\obeyspaces%
! 1801: \gdef\vtablex #1^^M{%
! 1802: \tabley\vritemindex#1 \endtabley
! 1803: \def\Evtable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
! 1804: \let\Etable=\relax}}
! 1805:
! 1806: \def\dontindex #1{}
! 1807: \def\fnitemindex #1{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}}%
! 1808: \def\vritemindex #1{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}}%
! 1809:
! 1810: {\obeyspaces %
! 1811: \gdef\tabley#1#2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7\endtabley{\endgroup%
! 1812: \tablez{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}}}
! 1813:
! 1814: \def\tablez #1#2#3#4#5#6{%
! 1815: \aboveenvbreak %
! 1816: \begingroup %
! 1817: \def\Edescription{\Etable}% Necessary kludge.
! 1818: \let\itemindex=#1%
! 1819: \ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \leftskip by #3\mil \fi %
! 1820: \ifnum 0#4>0 \tableindent=#4\mil \fi %
! 1821: \ifnum 0#5>0 \advance \rightskip by #5\mil \fi %
! 1822: \def\itemfont{#2}%
! 1823: \itemmax=\tableindent %
! 1824: \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin %
! 1825: \advance \leftskip by \tableindent %
! 1826: \exdentamount=\tableindent
! 1827: \parindent = 0pt
! 1828: \parskip = \smallskipamount
! 1829: \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi%
! 1830: \def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
! 1831: \let\item = \internalBitem %
! 1832: \let\itemx = \internalBitemx %
! 1833: \let\kitem = \internalBkitem %
! 1834: \let\kitemx = \internalBkitemx %
! 1835: \let\xitem = \internalBxitem %
! 1836: \let\xitemx = \internalBxitemx %
! 1837: }
! 1838:
! 1839: % This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize
! 1840:
! 1841: \newcount \itemno
! 1842:
! 1843: \def\itemize{\parsearg\itemizezzz}
! 1844:
! 1845: \def\itemizezzz #1{%
! 1846: \begingroup % ended by the @end itemize
! 1847: \itemizey {#1}{\Eitemize}
! 1848: }
! 1849:
! 1850: \def\itemizey #1#2{%
! 1851: \aboveenvbreak %
! 1852: \itemmax=\itemindent %
! 1853: \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin %
! 1854: \advance \leftskip by \itemindent %
! 1855: \exdentamount=\itemindent
! 1856: \parindent = 0pt %
! 1857: \parskip = \smallskipamount %
! 1858: \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi%
! 1859: \def#2{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
! 1860: \def\itemcontents{#1}%
! 1861: \let\item=\itemizeitem}
! 1862:
! 1863: % Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value.
! 1864: % These are `.?!:;,'
! 1865: \def\frenchspacing{\sfcode46=1000 \sfcode63=1000 \sfcode33=1000
! 1866: \sfcode58=1000 \sfcode59=1000 \sfcode44=1000 }
! 1867:
! 1868: % \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in
! 1869: % TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder.
! 1870: %
! 1871: \def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}%
! 1872:
! 1873: % Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter,
! 1874: % or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list. No
! 1875: % argument is the same as `1'.
! 1876: %
! 1877: \def\enumerate{\parsearg\enumeratezzz}
! 1878: \def\enumeratezzz #1{\enumeratey #1 \endenumeratey}
! 1879: \def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{%
! 1880: \begingroup % ended by the @end enumerate
! 1881: %
! 1882: % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'.
! 1883: \def\thearg{#1}%
! 1884: \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi
! 1885: %
! 1886: % Detect if the argument is a single token. If so, it might be a
! 1887: % letter. Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number.
! 1888: % (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made.
! 1889: % This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at
! 1890: % all -- the first parameter is undelimited.)
! 1891: \expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark
! 1892: \ifx\rest\empty
! 1893: % Only one token in the argument. It could still be anything.
! 1894: % A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero.
! 1895: % An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and
! 1896: % not equal to itself.
! 1897: % Otherwise, we assume it's a number.
! 1898: %
! 1899: % We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from
! 1900: % continuing to look for a <number>.
! 1901: %
! 1902: \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax
! 1903: \numericenumerate % a number (we hope)
! 1904: \else
! 1905: % It's a letter.
! 1906: \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax
! 1907: \lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter
! 1908: \else
! 1909: \uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter
! 1910: \fi
! 1911: \fi
! 1912: \else
! 1913: % Multiple tokens in the argument. We hope it's a number.
! 1914: \numericenumerate
! 1915: \fi
! 1916: }
! 1917:
! 1918: % An @enumerate whose labels are integers. The starting integer is
! 1919: % given in \thearg.
! 1920: %
! 1921: \def\numericenumerate{%
! 1922: \itemno = \thearg
! 1923: \startenumeration{\the\itemno}%
! 1924: }
! 1925:
! 1926: % The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg.
! 1927: \def\lowercaseenumerate{%
! 1928: \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
! 1929: \startenumeration{%
! 1930: % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
! 1931: \ifnum\itemno=0
! 1932: \errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
! 1933: alphabet}%
! 1934: \fi
! 1935: \char\lccode\itemno
! 1936: }%
! 1937: }
! 1938:
! 1939: % The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg.
! 1940: \def\uppercaseenumerate{%
! 1941: \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
! 1942: \startenumeration{%
! 1943: % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
! 1944: \ifnum\itemno=0
! 1945: \errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
! 1946: alphabet}
! 1947: \fi
! 1948: \char\uccode\itemno
! 1949: }%
! 1950: }
! 1951:
! 1952: % Call itemizey, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the
! 1953: % common last two arguments. Also subtract one from the initial value in
! 1954: % \itemno, since @item increments \itemno.
! 1955: %
! 1956: \def\startenumeration#1{%
! 1957: \advance\itemno by -1
! 1958: \itemizey{#1.}\Eenumerate\flushcr
! 1959: }
! 1960:
! 1961: % @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg
! 1962: % to @enumerate.
! 1963: %
! 1964: \def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}}
! 1965: \def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}}
! 1966: \def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate}
! 1967: \def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate}
! 1968:
! 1969: % Definition of @item while inside @itemize.
! 1970:
! 1971: \def\itemizeitem{%
! 1972: \advance\itemno by 1
! 1973: {\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}%
! 1974: \ifhmode \errmessage{In hmode at itemizeitem}\fi
! 1975: {\parskip=0in \hskip 0pt
! 1976: \hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents\hskip \itemmargin}%
! 1977: \vadjust{\penalty 1200}}%
! 1978: \flushcr}
! 1979:
! 1980: % @multitable macros
! 1981: % Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96
! 1982: %
! 1983: % @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired.
! 1984: % Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble. Width
! 1985: % can be specified either with sample text given in a template line,
! 1986: % or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page.
! 1987:
! 1988: % Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines.
! 1989:
! 1990: % To make preamble:
! 1991: %
! 1992: % Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize:
! 1993: % @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45
! 1994: % @item ...
! 1995: %
! 1996: % Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total
! 1997: % current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many
! 1998: % columns as desired.
! 1999:
! 2000:
! 2001: % Or use a template:
! 2002: % @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
! 2003: % @item ...
! 2004: % using the widest term desired in each column.
! 2005: %
! 2006: % For those who want to use more than one line's worth of words in
! 2007: % the preamble, break the line within one argument and it
! 2008: % will parse correctly, i.e.,
! 2009: %
! 2010: % @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3
! 2011: % template}
! 2012: % Not:
! 2013: % @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template}
! 2014: % {Column 3 template}
! 2015:
! 2016: % Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column
! 2017: % starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's
! 2018: % with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed,
! 2019: % ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns.
! 2020:
! 2021: % @item, @tab, @multitable or @end multitable do not need to be on their
! 2022: % own lines, but it will not hurt if they are.
! 2023:
! 2024: % Sample multitable:
! 2025:
! 2026: % @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
! 2027: % @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col
! 2028: % @item
! 2029: % first col stuff
! 2030: % @tab
! 2031: % second col stuff
! 2032: % @tab
! 2033: % third col
! 2034: % @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff
! 2035: % @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column.
! 2036: %
! 2037: % They will wrap at the width determined by the template.
! 2038: % @item@tab@tab This will be in third column.
! 2039: % @end multitable
! 2040:
! 2041: % Default dimensions may be reset by user.
! 2042: % @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table.
! 2043: % @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table.
! 2044: % @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns.
! 2045: % @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline
! 2046: % to baseline.
! 2047: % 0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing.
! 2048: %
! 2049: \newskip\multitableparskip
! 2050: \newskip\multitableparindent
! 2051: \newdimen\multitablecolspace
! 2052: \newskip\multitablelinespace
! 2053: \multitableparskip=0pt
! 2054: \multitableparindent=6pt
! 2055: \multitablecolspace=12pt
! 2056: \multitablelinespace=0pt
! 2057:
! 2058: % Macros used to set up halign preamble:
! 2059: %
! 2060: \let\endsetuptable\relax
! 2061: \def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable}
! 2062: \let\columnfractions\relax
! 2063: \def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions}
! 2064: \newif\ifsetpercent
! 2065:
! 2066: % #1 is the part of the @columnfraction before the decimal point, which
! 2067: % is presumably either 0 or the empty string (but we don't check, we
! 2068: % just throw it away). #2 is the decimal part, which we use as the
! 2069: % percent of \hsize for this column.
! 2070: \def\pickupwholefraction#1.#2 {%
! 2071: \global\advance\colcount by 1
! 2072: \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{.#2\hsize}%
! 2073: \setuptable
! 2074: }
! 2075:
! 2076: \newcount\colcount
! 2077: \def\setuptable#1{%
! 2078: \def\firstarg{#1}%
! 2079: \ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable
! 2080: \let\go = \relax
! 2081: \else
! 2082: \ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions
! 2083: \global\setpercenttrue
! 2084: \else
! 2085: \ifsetpercent
! 2086: \let\go\pickupwholefraction
! 2087: \else
! 2088: \global\advance\colcount by 1
! 2089: \setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip }% Add a normal word space as a separator;
! 2090: % typically that is always in the input, anyway.
! 2091: \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}%
! 2092: \fi
! 2093: \fi
! 2094: \ifx\go\pickupwholefraction
! 2095: % Put the argument back for the \pickupwholefraction call, so
! 2096: % we'll always have a period there to be parsed.
! 2097: \def\go{\pickupwholefraction#1}%
! 2098: \else
! 2099: \let\go = \setuptable
! 2100: \fi%
! 2101: \fi
! 2102: \go
! 2103: }
! 2104:
! 2105: % This used to have \hskip1sp. But then the space in a template line is
! 2106: % not enough. That is bad. So let's go back to just & until we
! 2107: % encounter the problem it was intended to solve again.
! 2108: % --karl, nathan@acm.org, 20apr99.
! 2109: \def\tab{&}
! 2110:
! 2111: % @multitable ... @end multitable definitions:
! 2112: %
! 2113: \def\multitable{\parsearg\dotable}
! 2114: \def\dotable#1{\bgroup
! 2115: \vskip\parskip
! 2116: \let\item\crcr
! 2117: \tolerance=9500
! 2118: \hbadness=9500
! 2119: \setmultitablespacing
! 2120: \parskip=\multitableparskip
! 2121: \parindent=\multitableparindent
! 2122: \overfullrule=0pt
! 2123: \global\colcount=0
! 2124: \def\Emultitable{\global\setpercentfalse\cr\egroup\egroup}%
! 2125: %
! 2126: % To parse everything between @multitable and @item:
! 2127: \setuptable#1 \endsetuptable
! 2128: %
! 2129: % \everycr will reset column counter, \colcount, at the end of
! 2130: % each line. Every column entry will cause \colcount to advance by one.
! 2131: % The table preamble
! 2132: % looks at the current \colcount to find the correct column width.
! 2133: \everycr{\noalign{%
! 2134: %
! 2135: % \filbreak%% keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages.
! 2136: % Maybe so, but it also creates really weird page breaks when the table
! 2137: % breaks over pages. Wouldn't \vfil be better? Wait until the problem
! 2138: % manifests itself, so it can be fixed for real --karl.
! 2139: \global\colcount=0\relax}}%
! 2140: %
! 2141: % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will
! 2142: % be used as many times as user calls for columns.
! 2143: % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and
! 2144: % continue for many paragraphs if desired.
! 2145: \halign\bgroup&\global\advance\colcount by 1\relax
! 2146: \multistrut\vtop{\hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname
! 2147: %
! 2148: % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other
! 2149: % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after
! 2150: % the first one.
! 2151: %
! 2152: % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace
! 2153: % to the width of each template entry.
! 2154: %
! 2155: % If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will
! 2156: % use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip
! 2157: % will keep entries from bumping into each other. Table will start at
! 2158: % left margin and final column will justify at right margin.
! 2159: %
! 2160: % Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment.
! 2161: \rightskip=0pt
! 2162: \ifnum\colcount=1
! 2163: % The first column will be indented with the surrounding text.
! 2164: \advance\hsize by\leftskip
! 2165: \else
! 2166: \ifsetpercent \else
! 2167: % If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize
! 2168: % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace.
! 2169: \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace
! 2170: \fi
! 2171: % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace:
! 2172: \leftskip=\multitablecolspace
! 2173: \fi
! 2174: % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious
! 2175: % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the
! 2176: % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself.
! 2177: % For example:
! 2178: % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89
! 2179: % @item @code{#}
! 2180: % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country.
! 2181: % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively marking
! 2182: % characters.
! 2183: \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut}\cr
! 2184: }
! 2185:
! 2186: \def\setmultitablespacing{% test to see if user has set \multitablelinespace.
! 2187: % If so, do nothing. If not, give it an appropriate dimension based on
! 2188: % current baselineskip.
! 2189: \ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt
! 2190: \setbox0=\vbox{X}\global\multitablelinespace=\the\baselineskip
! 2191: \global\advance\multitablelinespace by-\ht0
! 2192: %% strut to put in table in case some entry doesn't have descenders,
! 2193: %% to keep lines equally spaced
! 2194: \let\multistrut = \strut
! 2195: \else
! 2196: %% FIXME: what is \box0 supposed to be?
! 2197: \gdef\multistrut{\vrule height\multitablelinespace depth\dp0
! 2198: width0pt\relax} \fi
! 2199: %% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of
! 2200: %% table. If not, do nothing.
! 2201: %% If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace.
! 2202: \ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace
! 2203: \global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
! 2204: \global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller
! 2205: %% than skip between lines in the table.
! 2206: \fi%
! 2207: \ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt
! 2208: \global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
! 2209: \global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller
! 2210: %% than skip between lines in the table.
! 2211: \fi}
! 2212:
! 2213:
! 2214: \message{conditionals,}
! 2215: % Prevent errors for section commands.
! 2216: % Used in @ignore and in failing conditionals.
! 2217: \def\ignoresections{%
! 2218: \let\chapter=\relax
! 2219: \let\unnumbered=\relax
! 2220: \let\top=\relax
! 2221: \let\unnumberedsec=\relax
! 2222: \let\unnumberedsection=\relax
! 2223: \let\unnumberedsubsec=\relax
! 2224: \let\unnumberedsubsection=\relax
! 2225: \let\unnumberedsubsubsec=\relax
! 2226: \let\unnumberedsubsubsection=\relax
! 2227: \let\section=\relax
! 2228: \let\subsec=\relax
! 2229: \let\subsubsec=\relax
! 2230: \let\subsection=\relax
! 2231: \let\subsubsection=\relax
! 2232: \let\appendix=\relax
! 2233: \let\appendixsec=\relax
! 2234: \let\appendixsection=\relax
! 2235: \let\appendixsubsec=\relax
! 2236: \let\appendixsubsection=\relax
! 2237: \let\appendixsubsubsec=\relax
! 2238: \let\appendixsubsubsection=\relax
! 2239: \let\contents=\relax
! 2240: \let\smallbook=\relax
! 2241: \let\titlepage=\relax
! 2242: }
! 2243:
! 2244: % Used in nested conditionals, where we have to parse the Texinfo source
! 2245: % and so want to turn off most commands, in case they are used
! 2246: % incorrectly.
! 2247: %
! 2248: \def\ignoremorecommands{%
! 2249: \let\defcodeindex = \relax
! 2250: \let\defcv = \relax
! 2251: \let\deffn = \relax
! 2252: \let\deffnx = \relax
! 2253: \let\defindex = \relax
! 2254: \let\defivar = \relax
! 2255: \let\defmac = \relax
! 2256: \let\defmethod = \relax
! 2257: \let\defop = \relax
! 2258: \let\defopt = \relax
! 2259: \let\defspec = \relax
! 2260: \let\deftp = \relax
! 2261: \let\deftypefn = \relax
! 2262: \let\deftypefun = \relax
! 2263: \let\deftypeivar = \relax
! 2264: \let\deftypeop = \relax
! 2265: \let\deftypevar = \relax
! 2266: \let\deftypevr = \relax
! 2267: \let\defun = \relax
! 2268: \let\defvar = \relax
! 2269: \let\defvr = \relax
! 2270: \let\ref = \relax
! 2271: \let\xref = \relax
! 2272: \let\printindex = \relax
! 2273: \let\pxref = \relax
! 2274: \let\settitle = \relax
! 2275: \let\setchapternewpage = \relax
! 2276: \let\setchapterstyle = \relax
! 2277: \let\everyheading = \relax
! 2278: \let\evenheading = \relax
! 2279: \let\oddheading = \relax
! 2280: \let\everyfooting = \relax
! 2281: \let\evenfooting = \relax
! 2282: \let\oddfooting = \relax
! 2283: \let\headings = \relax
! 2284: \let\include = \relax
! 2285: \let\lowersections = \relax
! 2286: \let\down = \relax
! 2287: \let\raisesections = \relax
! 2288: \let\up = \relax
! 2289: \let\set = \relax
! 2290: \let\clear = \relax
! 2291: \let\item = \relax
! 2292: }
! 2293:
! 2294: % Ignore @ignore ... @end ignore.
! 2295: %
! 2296: \def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}}
! 2297:
! 2298: % Ignore @ifinfo, @ifhtml, @ifnottex, @html, @menu, and @direntry text.
! 2299: %
! 2300: \def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}}
! 2301: \def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}}
! 2302: \def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}}
! 2303: \def\html{\doignore{html}}
! 2304: \def\menu{\doignore{menu}}
! 2305: \def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}}
! 2306:
! 2307: % @dircategory CATEGORY -- specify a category of the dir file
! 2308: % which this file should belong to. Ignore this in TeX.
! 2309: \let\dircategory = \comment
! 2310:
! 2311: % Ignore text until a line `@end #1'.
! 2312: %
! 2313: \def\doignore#1{\begingroup
! 2314: % Don't complain about control sequences we have declared \outer.
! 2315: \ignoresections
! 2316: %
! 2317: % Define a command to swallow text until we reach `@end #1'.
! 2318: % This @ is a catcode 12 token (that is the normal catcode of @ in
! 2319: % this texinfo.tex file). We change the catcode of @ below to match.
! 2320: \long\def\doignoretext##1@end #1{\enddoignore}%
! 2321: %
! 2322: % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants.
! 2323: \catcode32 = 10
! 2324: %
! 2325: % Ignore braces, too, so mismatched braces don't cause trouble.
! 2326: \catcode`\{ = 9
! 2327: \catcode`\} = 9
! 2328: %
! 2329: % We must not have @c interpreted as a control sequence.
! 2330: \catcode`\@ = 12
! 2331: %
! 2332: % Make the letter c a comment character so that the rest of the line
! 2333: % will be ignored. This way, the document can have (for example)
! 2334: % @c @end ifinfo
! 2335: % and the @end ifinfo will be properly ignored.
! 2336: % (We've just changed @ to catcode 12.)
! 2337: \catcode`\c = 14
! 2338: %
! 2339: % And now expand that command.
! 2340: \doignoretext
! 2341: }
! 2342:
! 2343: % What we do to finish off ignored text.
! 2344: %
! 2345: \def\enddoignore{\endgroup\ignorespaces}%
! 2346:
! 2347: \newif\ifwarnedobs\warnedobsfalse
! 2348: \def\obstexwarn{%
! 2349: \ifwarnedobs\relax\else
! 2350: % We need to warn folks that they may have trouble with TeX 3.0.
! 2351: % This uses \immediate\write16 rather than \message to get newlines.
! 2352: \immediate\write16{}
! 2353: \immediate\write16{WARNING: for users of Unix TeX 3.0!}
! 2354: \immediate\write16{This manual trips a bug in TeX version 3.0 (tex hangs).}
! 2355: \immediate\write16{If you are running another version of TeX, relax.}
! 2356: \immediate\write16{If you are running Unix TeX 3.0, kill this TeX process.}
! 2357: \immediate\write16{ Then upgrade your TeX installation if you can.}
! 2358: \immediate\write16{ (See ftp://ftp.gnu.org/pub/gnu/TeX.README.)}
! 2359: \immediate\write16{If you are stuck with version 3.0, run the}
! 2360: \immediate\write16{ script ``tex3patch'' from the Texinfo distribution}
! 2361: \immediate\write16{ to use a workaround.}
! 2362: \immediate\write16{}
! 2363: \global\warnedobstrue
! 2364: \fi
! 2365: }
! 2366:
! 2367: % **In TeX 3.0, setting text in \nullfont hangs tex. For a
! 2368: % workaround (which requires the file ``dummy.tfm'' to be installed),
! 2369: % uncomment the following line:
! 2370: %%%%%\font\nullfont=dummy\let\obstexwarn=\relax
! 2371:
! 2372: % Ignore text, except that we keep track of conditional commands for
! 2373: % purposes of nesting, up to an `@end #1' command.
! 2374: %
! 2375: \def\nestedignore#1{%
! 2376: \obstexwarn
! 2377: % We must actually expand the ignored text to look for the @end
! 2378: % command, so that nested ignore constructs work. Thus, we put the
! 2379: % text into a \vbox and then do nothing with the result. To minimize
! 2380: % the change of memory overflow, we follow the approach outlined on
! 2381: % page 401 of the TeXbook: make the current font be a dummy font.
! 2382: %
! 2383: \setbox0 = \vbox\bgroup
! 2384: % Don't complain about control sequences we have declared \outer.
! 2385: \ignoresections
! 2386: %
! 2387: % Define `@end #1' to end the box, which will in turn undefine the
! 2388: % @end command again.
! 2389: \expandafter\def\csname E#1\endcsname{\egroup\ignorespaces}%
! 2390: %
! 2391: % We are going to be parsing Texinfo commands. Most cause no
! 2392: % trouble when they are used incorrectly, but some commands do
! 2393: % complicated argument parsing or otherwise get confused, so we
! 2394: % undefine them.
! 2395: %
! 2396: % We can't do anything about stray @-signs, unfortunately;
! 2397: % they'll produce `undefined control sequence' errors.
! 2398: \ignoremorecommands
! 2399: %
! 2400: % Set the current font to be \nullfont, a TeX primitive, and define
! 2401: % all the font commands to also use \nullfont. We don't use
! 2402: % dummy.tfm, as suggested in the TeXbook, because not all sites
! 2403: % might have that installed. Therefore, math mode will still
! 2404: % produce output, but that should be an extremely small amount of
! 2405: % stuff compared to the main input.
! 2406: %
! 2407: \nullfont
! 2408: \let\tenrm=\nullfont \let\tenit=\nullfont \let\tensl=\nullfont
! 2409: \let\tenbf=\nullfont \let\tentt=\nullfont \let\smallcaps=\nullfont
! 2410: \let\tensf=\nullfont
! 2411: % Similarly for index fonts (mostly for their use in smallexample).
! 2412: \let\smallrm=\nullfont \let\smallit=\nullfont \let\smallsl=\nullfont
! 2413: \let\smallbf=\nullfont \let\smalltt=\nullfont \let\smallsc=\nullfont
! 2414: \let\smallsf=\nullfont
! 2415: %
! 2416: % Don't complain when characters are missing from the fonts.
! 2417: \tracinglostchars = 0
! 2418: %
! 2419: % Don't bother to do space factor calculations.
! 2420: \frenchspacing
! 2421: %
! 2422: % Don't report underfull hboxes.
! 2423: \hbadness = 10000
! 2424: %
! 2425: % Do minimal line-breaking.
! 2426: \pretolerance = 10000
! 2427: %
! 2428: % Do not execute instructions in @tex
! 2429: \def\tex{\doignore{tex}}%
! 2430: % Do not execute macro definitions.
! 2431: % `c' is a comment character, so the word `macro' will get cut off.
! 2432: \def\macro{\doignore{ma}}%
! 2433: }
! 2434:
! 2435: % @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value.
! 2436: % @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE.
! 2437: %
! 2438: % Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be
! 2439: % empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our
! 2440: % own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we
! 2441: % didn't need it. Make sure the catcode of space is correct to avoid
! 2442: % losing inside @example, for instance.
! 2443: %
! 2444: \def\set{\begingroup\catcode` =10
! 2445: \catcode`\-=12 \catcode`\_=12 % Allow - and _ in VAR.
! 2446: \parsearg\setxxx}
! 2447: \def\setxxx#1{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy}
! 2448: \def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{%
! 2449: \def\temp{#2}%
! 2450: \ifx\temp\empty \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname = \empty
! 2451: \else \setzzz{#1}#2\endsetzzz % Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted.
! 2452: \fi
! 2453: \endgroup
! 2454: }
! 2455: % Can't use \xdef to pre-expand #2 and save some time, since \temp or
! 2456: % \next or other control sequences that we've defined might get us into
! 2457: % an infinite loop. Consider `@set foo @cite{bar}'.
! 2458: \def\setzzz#1#2 \endsetzzz{\expandafter\gdef\csname SET#1\endcsname{#2}}
! 2459:
! 2460: % @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR.
! 2461: %
! 2462: \def\clear{\parsearg\clearxxx}
! 2463: \def\clearxxx#1{\global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax}
! 2464:
! 2465: % @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo.
! 2466: {
! 2467: \catcode`\_ = \active
! 2468: %
! 2469: % We might end up with active _ or - characters in the argument if
! 2470: % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}. So \let any
! 2471: % such active characters to their normal equivalents.
! 2472: \gdef\value{\begingroup
! 2473: \catcode`\-=12 \catcode`\_=12
! 2474: \indexbreaks \let_\normalunderscore
! 2475: \valuexxx}
! 2476: }
! 2477: \def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup}
! 2478:
! 2479: % We have this subroutine so that we can handle at least some @value's
! 2480: % properly in indexes (we \let\value to this in \indexdummies). Ones
! 2481: % whose names contain - or _ still won't work, but we can't do anything
! 2482: % about that. The command has to be fully expandable, since the result
! 2483: % winds up in the index file. This means that if the variable's value
! 2484: % contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost certain it will fail
! 2485: % (although perhaps we could fix that with sufficient work to do a
! 2486: % one-level expansion on the result, instead of complete).
! 2487: %
! 2488: \def\expandablevalue#1{%
! 2489: \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
! 2490: {[No value for ``#1'']}%
! 2491: \else
! 2492: \csname SET#1\endcsname
! 2493: \fi
! 2494: }
! 2495:
! 2496: % @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined
! 2497: % with @set.
! 2498: %
! 2499: \def\ifset{\parsearg\ifsetxxx}
! 2500: \def\ifsetxxx #1{%
! 2501: \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
! 2502: \expandafter\ifsetfail
! 2503: \else
! 2504: \expandafter\ifsetsucceed
! 2505: \fi
! 2506: }
! 2507: \def\ifsetsucceed{\conditionalsucceed{ifset}}
! 2508: \def\ifsetfail{\nestedignore{ifset}}
! 2509: \defineunmatchedend{ifset}
! 2510:
! 2511: % @ifclear VAR ... @end ifclear reads the `...' iff VAR has never been
! 2512: % defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear.
! 2513: %
! 2514: \def\ifclear{\parsearg\ifclearxxx}
! 2515: \def\ifclearxxx #1{%
! 2516: \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
! 2517: \expandafter\ifclearsucceed
! 2518: \else
! 2519: \expandafter\ifclearfail
! 2520: \fi
! 2521: }
! 2522: \def\ifclearsucceed{\conditionalsucceed{ifclear}}
! 2523: \def\ifclearfail{\nestedignore{ifclear}}
! 2524: \defineunmatchedend{ifclear}
! 2525:
! 2526: % @iftex, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo always succeed; we read the text
! 2527: % following, through the first @end iftex (etc.). Make `@end iftex'
! 2528: % (etc.) valid only after an @iftex.
! 2529: %
! 2530: \def\iftex{\conditionalsucceed{iftex}}
! 2531: \def\ifnothtml{\conditionalsucceed{ifnothtml}}
! 2532: \def\ifnotinfo{\conditionalsucceed{ifnotinfo}}
! 2533: \defineunmatchedend{iftex}
! 2534: \defineunmatchedend{ifnothtml}
! 2535: \defineunmatchedend{ifnotinfo}
! 2536:
! 2537: % We can't just want to start a group at @iftex (for example) and end it
! 2538: % at @end iftex, since then @set commands inside the conditional have no
! 2539: % effect (they'd get reverted at the end of the group). So we must
! 2540: % define \Eiftex to redefine itself to be its previous value. (We can't
! 2541: % just define it to fail again with an ``unmatched end'' error, since
! 2542: % the @ifset might be nested.)
! 2543: %
! 2544: \def\conditionalsucceed#1{%
! 2545: \edef\temp{%
! 2546: % Remember the current value of \E#1.
! 2547: \let\nece{prevE#1} = \nece{E#1}%
! 2548: %
! 2549: % At the `@end #1', redefine \E#1 to be its previous value.
! 2550: \def\nece{E#1}{\let\nece{E#1} = \nece{prevE#1}}%
! 2551: }%
! 2552: \temp
! 2553: }
! 2554:
! 2555: % We need to expand lots of \csname's, but we don't want to expand the
! 2556: % control sequences after we've constructed them.
! 2557: %
! 2558: \def\nece#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname}
! 2559:
! 2560: % @defininfoenclose.
! 2561: \let\definfoenclose=\comment
! 2562:
! 2563:
! 2564: \message{indexing,}
! 2565: % Index generation facilities
! 2566:
! 2567: % Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite
! 2568: % except not \outer, so it can be used within \newindex.
! 2569: {\catcode`\@=11
! 2570: \gdef\newwrite{\alloc@7\write\chardef\sixt@@n}}
! 2571:
! 2572: % \newindex {foo} defines an index named foo.
! 2573: % It automatically defines \fooindex such that
! 2574: % \fooindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index foo.
! 2575: % It also defines \fooindfile to be the number of the output channel for
! 2576: % the file that accumulates this index. The file's extension is foo.
! 2577: % The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long
! 2578: % for the sake of vms.
! 2579: %
! 2580: \def\newindex#1{%
! 2581: \iflinks
! 2582: \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
! 2583: \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file
! 2584: \fi
! 2585: \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define @#1index
! 2586: \noexpand\doindex{#1}}
! 2587: }
! 2588:
! 2589: % @defindex foo == \newindex{foo}
! 2590:
! 2591: \def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex}
! 2592:
! 2593: % Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code.
! 2594:
! 2595: \def\newcodeindex#1{%
! 2596: \iflinks
! 2597: \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
! 2598: \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1
! 2599: \fi
! 2600: \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{%
! 2601: \noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}
! 2602: }
! 2603:
! 2604: \def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex}
! 2605:
! 2606: % @synindex foo bar makes index foo feed into index bar.
! 2607: % Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index.
! 2608: % The \closeout helps reduce unnecessary open files; the limit on the
! 2609: % Acorn RISC OS is a mere 16 files.
! 2610: \def\synindex#1 #2 {%
! 2611: \expandafter\let\expandafter\synindexfoo\expandafter=\csname#2indfile\endcsname
! 2612: \expandafter\closeout\csname#1indfile\endcsname
! 2613: \expandafter\let\csname#1indfile\endcsname=\synindexfoo
! 2614: \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% define \xxxindex
! 2615: \noexpand\doindex{#2}}%
! 2616: }
! 2617:
! 2618: % @syncodeindex foo bar similar, but put all entries made for index foo
! 2619: % inside @code.
! 2620: \def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {%
! 2621: \expandafter\let\expandafter\synindexfoo\expandafter=\csname#2indfile\endcsname
! 2622: \expandafter\closeout\csname#1indfile\endcsname
! 2623: \expandafter\let\csname#1indfile\endcsname=\synindexfoo
! 2624: \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% define \xxxindex
! 2625: \noexpand\docodeindex{#2}}%
! 2626: }
! 2627:
! 2628: % Define \doindex, the driver for all \fooindex macros.
! 2629: % Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro,
! 2630: % and it is "foo", the name of the index.
! 2631:
! 2632: % \doindex just uses \parsearg; it calls \doind for the actual work.
! 2633: % This is because \doind is more useful to call from other macros.
! 2634:
! 2635: % There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic}
! 2636: % which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index.
! 2637:
! 2638: \def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singleindexer}
! 2639: \def\singleindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}}
! 2640:
! 2641: % like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument.
! 2642: \def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singlecodeindexer}
! 2643: \def\singlecodeindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}}
! 2644:
! 2645: \def\indexdummies{%
! 2646: \def\ { }%
! 2647: % Take care of the plain tex accent commands.
! 2648: \def\"{\realbackslash "}%
! 2649: \def\`{\realbackslash `}%
! 2650: \def\'{\realbackslash '}%
! 2651: \def\^{\realbackslash ^}%
! 2652: \def\~{\realbackslash ~}%
! 2653: \def\={\realbackslash =}%
! 2654: \def\b{\realbackslash b}%
! 2655: \def\c{\realbackslash c}%
! 2656: \def\d{\realbackslash d}%
! 2657: \def\u{\realbackslash u}%
! 2658: \def\v{\realbackslash v}%
! 2659: \def\H{\realbackslash H}%
! 2660: % Take care of the plain tex special European modified letters.
! 2661: \def\oe{\realbackslash oe}%
! 2662: \def\ae{\realbackslash ae}%
! 2663: \def\aa{\realbackslash aa}%
! 2664: \def\OE{\realbackslash OE}%
! 2665: \def\AE{\realbackslash AE}%
! 2666: \def\AA{\realbackslash AA}%
! 2667: \def\o{\realbackslash o}%
! 2668: \def\O{\realbackslash O}%
! 2669: \def\l{\realbackslash l}%
! 2670: \def\L{\realbackslash L}%
! 2671: \def\ss{\realbackslash ss}%
! 2672: % Take care of texinfo commands likely to appear in an index entry.
! 2673: % (Must be a way to avoid doing expansion at all, and thus not have to
! 2674: % laboriously list every single command here.)
! 2675: \def\@{@}% will be @@ when we switch to @ as escape char.
! 2676: % Need these in case \tex is in effect and \{ is a \delimiter again.
! 2677: % But can't use \lbracecmd and \rbracecmd because texindex assumes
! 2678: % braces and backslashes are used only as delimiters.
! 2679: \let\{ = \mylbrace
! 2680: \let\} = \myrbrace
! 2681: \def\_{{\realbackslash _}}%
! 2682: \def\w{\realbackslash w }%
! 2683: \def\bf{\realbackslash bf }%
! 2684: %\def\rm{\realbackslash rm }%
! 2685: \def\sl{\realbackslash sl }%
! 2686: \def\sf{\realbackslash sf}%
! 2687: \def\tt{\realbackslash tt}%
! 2688: \def\gtr{\realbackslash gtr}%
! 2689: \def\less{\realbackslash less}%
! 2690: \def\hat{\realbackslash hat}%
! 2691: \def\TeX{\realbackslash TeX}%
! 2692: \def\dots{\realbackslash dots }%
! 2693: \def\result{\realbackslash result}%
! 2694: \def\equiv{\realbackslash equiv}%
! 2695: \def\expansion{\realbackslash expansion}%
! 2696: \def\print{\realbackslash print}%
! 2697: \def\error{\realbackslash error}%
! 2698: \def\point{\realbackslash point}%
! 2699: \def\copyright{\realbackslash copyright}%
! 2700: \def\tclose##1{\realbackslash tclose {##1}}%
! 2701: \def\code##1{\realbackslash code {##1}}%
! 2702: \def\uref##1{\realbackslash uref {##1}}%
! 2703: \def\url##1{\realbackslash url {##1}}%
! 2704: \def\env##1{\realbackslash env {##1}}%
! 2705: \def\command##1{\realbackslash command {##1}}%
! 2706: \def\option##1{\realbackslash option {##1}}%
! 2707: \def\dotless##1{\realbackslash dotless {##1}}%
! 2708: \def\samp##1{\realbackslash samp {##1}}%
! 2709: \def\,##1{\realbackslash ,{##1}}%
! 2710: \def\t##1{\realbackslash t {##1}}%
! 2711: \def\r##1{\realbackslash r {##1}}%
! 2712: \def\i##1{\realbackslash i {##1}}%
! 2713: \def\b##1{\realbackslash b {##1}}%
! 2714: \def\sc##1{\realbackslash sc {##1}}%
! 2715: \def\cite##1{\realbackslash cite {##1}}%
! 2716: \def\key##1{\realbackslash key {##1}}%
! 2717: \def\file##1{\realbackslash file {##1}}%
! 2718: \def\var##1{\realbackslash var {##1}}%
! 2719: \def\kbd##1{\realbackslash kbd {##1}}%
! 2720: \def\dfn##1{\realbackslash dfn {##1}}%
! 2721: \def\emph##1{\realbackslash emph {##1}}%
! 2722: \def\acronym##1{\realbackslash acronym {##1}}%
! 2723: %
! 2724: % Handle some cases of @value -- where the variable name does not
! 2725: % contain - or _, and the value does not contain any
! 2726: % (non-fully-expandable) commands.
! 2727: \let\value = \expandablevalue
! 2728: %
! 2729: \unsepspaces
! 2730: % Turn off macro expansion
! 2731: \turnoffmacros
! 2732: }
! 2733:
! 2734: % If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces
! 2735: % therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the
! 2736: % expansion of \tie (\\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ).
! 2737: {\obeyspaces
! 2738: \gdef\unsepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\space}}
! 2739:
! 2740: % \indexnofonts no-ops all font-change commands.
! 2741: % This is used when outputting the strings to sort the index by.
! 2742: \def\indexdummyfont#1{#1}
! 2743: \def\indexdummytex{TeX}
! 2744: \def\indexdummydots{...}
! 2745:
! 2746: \def\indexnofonts{%
! 2747: % Just ignore accents.
! 2748: \let\,=\indexdummyfont
! 2749: \let\"=\indexdummyfont
! 2750: \let\`=\indexdummyfont
! 2751: \let\'=\indexdummyfont
! 2752: \let\^=\indexdummyfont
! 2753: \let\~=\indexdummyfont
! 2754: \let\==\indexdummyfont
! 2755: \let\b=\indexdummyfont
! 2756: \let\c=\indexdummyfont
! 2757: \let\d=\indexdummyfont
! 2758: \let\u=\indexdummyfont
! 2759: \let\v=\indexdummyfont
! 2760: \let\H=\indexdummyfont
! 2761: \let\dotless=\indexdummyfont
! 2762: % Take care of the plain tex special European modified letters.
! 2763: \def\oe{oe}%
! 2764: \def\ae{ae}%
! 2765: \def\aa{aa}%
! 2766: \def\OE{OE}%
! 2767: \def\AE{AE}%
! 2768: \def\AA{AA}%
! 2769: \def\o{o}%
! 2770: \def\O{O}%
! 2771: \def\l{l}%
! 2772: \def\L{L}%
! 2773: \def\ss{ss}%
! 2774: \let\w=\indexdummyfont
! 2775: \let\t=\indexdummyfont
! 2776: \let\r=\indexdummyfont
! 2777: \let\i=\indexdummyfont
! 2778: \let\b=\indexdummyfont
! 2779: \let\emph=\indexdummyfont
! 2780: \let\strong=\indexdummyfont
! 2781: \let\cite=\indexdummyfont
! 2782: \let\sc=\indexdummyfont
! 2783: %Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command
! 2784: % and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |...
! 2785: %\let\tt=\indexdummyfont
! 2786: \let\tclose=\indexdummyfont
! 2787: \let\code=\indexdummyfont
! 2788: \let\url=\indexdummyfont
! 2789: \let\uref=\indexdummyfont
! 2790: \let\env=\indexdummyfont
! 2791: \let\acronym=\indexdummyfont
! 2792: \let\command=\indexdummyfont
! 2793: \let\option=\indexdummyfont
! 2794: \let\file=\indexdummyfont
! 2795: \let\samp=\indexdummyfont
! 2796: \let\kbd=\indexdummyfont
! 2797: \let\key=\indexdummyfont
! 2798: \let\var=\indexdummyfont
! 2799: \let\TeX=\indexdummytex
! 2800: \let\dots=\indexdummydots
! 2801: \def\@{@}%
! 2802: }
! 2803:
! 2804: % To define \realbackslash, we must make \ not be an escape.
! 2805: % We must first make another character (@) an escape
! 2806: % so we do not become unable to do a definition.
! 2807:
! 2808: {\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\other
! 2809: @gdef@realbackslash{\}}
! 2810:
! 2811: \let\indexbackslash=0 %overridden during \printindex.
! 2812: \let\SETmarginindex=\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)?
! 2813:
! 2814: % For \ifx comparisons.
! 2815: \def\emptymacro{\empty}
! 2816:
! 2817: % Most index entries go through here, but \dosubind is the general case.
! 2818: %
! 2819: \def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}\empty}
! 2820:
! 2821: % Workhorse for all \fooindexes.
! 2822: % #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there, #3 is subentry --
! 2823: % \empty if called from \doind, as we usually are. The main exception
! 2824: % is with defuns, which call us directly.
! 2825: %
! 2826: \def\dosubind#1#2#3{%
! 2827: % Put the index entry in the margin if desired.
! 2828: \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else
! 2829: \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt #2}}%
! 2830: \fi
! 2831: {%
! 2832: \count255=\lastpenalty
! 2833: {%
! 2834: \indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage
! 2835: \escapechar=`\\
! 2836: {%
! 2837: \let\folio = 0% We will expand all macros now EXCEPT \folio.
! 2838: \def\rawbackslashxx{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now
! 2839: % so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash.
! 2840: %
! 2841: \def\thirdarg{#3}%
! 2842: %
! 2843: % If third arg is present, precede it with space in sort key.
! 2844: \ifx\thirdarg\emptymacro
! 2845: \let\subentry = \empty
! 2846: \else
! 2847: \def\subentry{ #3}%
! 2848: \fi
! 2849: %
! 2850: % First process the index entry with all font commands turned
! 2851: % off to get the string to sort by.
! 2852: {\indexnofonts \xdef\indexsorttmp{#2\subentry}}%
! 2853: %
! 2854: % Now the real index entry with the fonts.
! 2855: \toks0 = {#2}%
! 2856: %
! 2857: % If third (subentry) arg is present, add it to the index
! 2858: % string. And include a space.
! 2859: \ifx\thirdarg\emptymacro \else
! 2860: \toks0 = \expandafter{\the\toks0 \space #3}%
! 2861: \fi
! 2862: %
! 2863: % Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key
! 2864: % and the original text, including any font commands. We write
! 2865: % three arguments to \entry to the .?? file, texindex reduces to
! 2866: % two when writing the .??s sorted result.
! 2867: \edef\temp{%
! 2868: \write\csname#1indfile\endcsname{%
! 2869: \realbackslash entry{\indexsorttmp}{\folio}{\the\toks0}}%
! 2870: }%
! 2871: %
! 2872: % If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it
! 2873: % by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting
! 2874: % the skip again. Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the
! 2875: % \write will make \lastskip zero. The result is that sequences
! 2876: % like this:
! 2877: % @end defun
! 2878: % @tindex whatever
! 2879: % @defun ...
! 2880: % will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the
! 2881: % start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of
! 2882: % the previous defun.
! 2883: %
! 2884: % But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode. We
! 2885: % don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph.
! 2886: %
! 2887: % Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too.
! 2888: %
! 2889: \iflinks
! 2890: \ifvmode
! 2891: \skip0 = \lastskip
! 2892: \ifdim\lastskip = 0pt \else \nobreak\vskip-\lastskip \fi
! 2893: \fi
! 2894: %
! 2895: \temp % do the write
! 2896: %
! 2897: %
! 2898: \ifvmode \ifdim\skip0 = 0pt \else \nobreak\vskip\skip0 \fi \fi
! 2899: \fi
! 2900: }%
! 2901: }%
! 2902: \penalty\count255
! 2903: }%
! 2904: }
! 2905:
! 2906: % The index entry written in the file actually looks like
! 2907: % \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}
! 2908: % or
! 2909: % \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic}
! 2910: % The texindex program reads in these files and writes files
! 2911: % containing these kinds of lines:
! 2912: % \initial {c}
! 2913: % before the first topic whose initial is c
! 2914: % \entry {topic}{pagelist}
! 2915: % for a topic that is used without subtopics
! 2916: % \primary {topic}
! 2917: % for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics
! 2918: % \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist}
! 2919: % for each subtopic.
! 2920:
! 2921: % Define the user-accessible indexing commands
! 2922: % @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex.
! 2923:
! 2924: \def\findex {\fnindex}
! 2925: \def\kindex {\kyindex}
! 2926: \def\cindex {\cpindex}
! 2927: \def\vindex {\vrindex}
! 2928: \def\tindex {\tpindex}
! 2929: \def\pindex {\pgindex}
! 2930:
! 2931: \def\cindexsub {\begingroup\obeylines\cindexsub}
! 2932: {\obeylines %
! 2933: \gdef\cindexsub "#1" #2^^M{\endgroup %
! 2934: \dosubind{cp}{#2}{#1}}}
! 2935:
! 2936: % Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material.
! 2937:
! 2938: % @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed.
! 2939: % It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered).
! 2940: %
! 2941: \def\printindex{\parsearg\doprintindex}
! 2942: \def\doprintindex#1{\begingroup
! 2943: \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}%
! 2944: %
! 2945: \smallfonts \rm
! 2946: \tolerance = 9500
! 2947: \indexbreaks
! 2948: %
! 2949: % See if the index file exists and is nonempty.
! 2950: % Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains
! 2951: % \initial {@}
! 2952: % as its first line, TeX doesn't complain about mismatched braces
! 2953: % (because it thinks @} is a control sequence).
! 2954: \catcode`\@ = 11
! 2955: \openin 1 \jobname.#1s
! 2956: \ifeof 1
! 2957: % \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index,
! 2958: % and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the
! 2959: % index. The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure
! 2960: % there is some text.
! 2961: \putwordIndexNonexistent
! 2962: \else
! 2963: %
! 2964: % If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof
! 2965: % false. We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so
! 2966: % it can discover if there is anything in it.
! 2967: \read 1 to \temp
! 2968: \ifeof 1
! 2969: \putwordIndexIsEmpty
! 2970: \else
! 2971: % Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape
! 2972: % character. It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change
! 2973: % to make right now.
! 2974: \def\indexbackslash{\rawbackslashxx}%
! 2975: \catcode`\\ = 0
! 2976: \escapechar = `\\
! 2977: \begindoublecolumns
! 2978: \input \jobname.#1s
! 2979: \enddoublecolumns
! 2980: \fi
! 2981: \fi
! 2982: \closein 1
! 2983: \endgroup}
! 2984:
! 2985: % These macros are used by the sorted index file itself.
! 2986: % Change them to control the appearance of the index.
! 2987:
! 2988: \def\initial#1{{%
! 2989: % Some minor font changes for the special characters.
! 2990: \let\tentt=\sectt \let\tt=\sectt \let\sf=\sectt
! 2991: %
! 2992: % Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own.
! 2993: \removelastskip
! 2994: %
! 2995: % We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus.
! 2996: \penalty -300
! 2997: %
! 2998: % Typeset the initial. Making this add up to a whole number of
! 2999: % baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column
! 3000: % to column. It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch
! 3001: % we need before each entry, but it's better.
! 3002: %
! 3003: % No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns.
! 3004: \vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus .5\baselineskip
! 3005: \leftline{\secbf #1}%
! 3006: \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip
! 3007: %
! 3008: % Do our best not to break after the initial.
! 3009: \nobreak
! 3010: }}
! 3011:
! 3012: % This typesets a paragraph consisting of #1, dot leaders, and then #2
! 3013: % flush to the right margin. It is used for index and table of contents
! 3014: % entries. The paragraph is indented by \leftskip.
! 3015: %
! 3016: \def\entry#1#2{\begingroup
! 3017: %
! 3018: % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't
! 3019: % affect previous text.
! 3020: \par
! 3021: %
! 3022: % Do not fill out the last line with white space.
! 3023: \parfillskip = 0in
! 3024: %
! 3025: % No extra space above this paragraph.
! 3026: \parskip = 0in
! 3027: %
! 3028: % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines.
! 3029: \finalhyphendemerits = 0
! 3030: %
! 3031: % \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number
! 3032: % don't both fit on one line. In that case, bob suggests starting the
! 3033: % dots pretty far over on the line. Unfortunately, a large
! 3034: % indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across
! 3035: % lines. So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders.
! 3036: %
! 3037: % \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start
! 3038: % of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that.
! 3039: \hangindent = 2em
! 3040: %
! 3041: % When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line
! 3042: % with blank space.
! 3043: \rightskip = 0pt plus1fil
! 3044: %
! 3045: % A bit of stretch before each entry for the benefit of balancing columns.
! 3046: \vskip 0pt plus1pt
! 3047: %
! 3048: % Start a ``paragraph'' for the index entry so the line breaking
! 3049: % parameters we've set above will have an effect.
! 3050: \noindent
! 3051: %
! 3052: % Insert the text of the index entry. TeX will do line-breaking on it.
! 3053: #1%
! 3054: % The following is kludged to not output a line of dots in the index if
! 3055: % there are no page numbers. The next person who breaks this will be
! 3056: % cursed by a Unix daemon.
! 3057: \def\tempa{{\rm }}%
! 3058: \def\tempb{#2}%
! 3059: \edef\tempc{\tempa}%
! 3060: \edef\tempd{\tempb}%
! 3061: \ifx\tempc\tempd\ \else%
! 3062: %
! 3063: % If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out
! 3064: % this line with blank space. (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the
! 3065: % fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.)
! 3066: \hfil\penalty50
! 3067: \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number.
! 3068: %
! 3069: % The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as
! 3070: % part of (the primitive) \par. Without it, a spurious underfull
! 3071: % \hbox ensues.
! 3072: \ifpdf
! 3073: \pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph.
! 3074: \else
! 3075: \ #2% The page number ends the paragraph.
! 3076: \fi
! 3077: \fi%
! 3078: \par
! 3079: \endgroup}
! 3080:
! 3081: % Like \dotfill except takes at least 1 em.
! 3082: \def\indexdotfill{\cleaders
! 3083: \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu ${\it .}$ \mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1fill}
! 3084:
! 3085: \def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}}
! 3086:
! 3087: \newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=0.5cm
! 3088:
! 3089: \def\secondary #1#2{
! 3090: {\parfillskip=0in \parskip=0in
! 3091: \hangindent =1in \hangafter=1
! 3092: \noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill #2\par
! 3093: }}
! 3094:
! 3095: % Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes.
! 3096: % Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say,
! 3097: % the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself.
! 3098: \catcode`\@=11
! 3099:
! 3100: \newbox\partialpage
! 3101: \newdimen\doublecolumnhsize
! 3102:
! 3103: \def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns
! 3104: % Grab any single-column material above us.
! 3105: \output = {%
! 3106: %
! 3107: % Here is a possibility not foreseen in manmac: if we accumulate a
! 3108: % whole lot of material, we might end up calling this \output
! 3109: % routine twice in a row (see the doublecol-lose test, which is
! 3110: % essentially a couple of indexes with @setchapternewpage off). In
! 3111: % that case we just ship out what is in \partialpage with the normal
! 3112: % output routine. Generally, \partialpage will be empty when this
! 3113: % runs and this will be a no-op. See the indexspread.tex test case.
! 3114: \ifvoid\partialpage \else
! 3115: \onepageout{\pagecontents\partialpage}%
! 3116: \fi
! 3117: %
! 3118: \global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{%
! 3119: % Unvbox the main output page.
! 3120: \unvbox\PAGE
! 3121: \kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip
! 3122: }%
! 3123: }%
! 3124: \eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage
! 3125: %
! 3126: % Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages.
! 3127: \output = {\doublecolumnout}%
! 3128: %
! 3129: % Change the page size parameters. We could do this once outside this
! 3130: % routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11
! 3131: % format, but then we repeat the same computation. Repeating a couple
! 3132: % of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the
! 3133: % execution time, so we may as well do it in one place.
! 3134: %
! 3135: % First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between
! 3136: % the columns. We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it
! 3137: % changes automatically with the paper format. The magic constant
! 3138: % below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt)
! 3139: % as it did when we hard-coded it.
! 3140: %
! 3141: % We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we
! 3142: % can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially)
! 3143: % been clobbered.
! 3144: %
! 3145: \doublecolumnhsize = \hsize
! 3146: \advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize
! 3147: \divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2
! 3148: \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
! 3149: %
! 3150: % Double the \vsize as well. (We don't need a separate register here,
! 3151: % since nobody clobbers \vsize.)
! 3152: \advance\vsize by -\ht\partialpage
! 3153: \vsize = 2\vsize
! 3154: }
! 3155:
! 3156: % The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except
! 3157: % the last.
! 3158: %
! 3159: \def\doublecolumnout{%
! 3160: \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth
! 3161: % Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal
! 3162: % (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the
! 3163: % previous page.
! 3164: \dimen@ = \vsize
! 3165: \divide\dimen@ by 2
! 3166: %
! 3167: % box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right.
! 3168: \setbox0=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit255 to\dimen@
! 3169: \onepageout\pagesofar
! 3170: \unvbox255
! 3171: \penalty\outputpenalty
! 3172: }
! 3173: \def\pagesofar{%
! 3174: % Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material,
! 3175: % followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2.
! 3176: \unvbox\partialpage
! 3177: %
! 3178: \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
! 3179: \wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize
! 3180: \hbox to\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}%
! 3181: }
! 3182: \def\enddoublecolumns{%
! 3183: \output = {%
! 3184: % Split the last of the double-column material. Leave it on the
! 3185: % current page, no automatic page break.
! 3186: \balancecolumns
! 3187: %
! 3188: % If we end up splitting too much material for the current page,
! 3189: % though, there will be another page break right after this \output
! 3190: % invocation ends. Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not
! 3191: % want to call it again. Therefore, reset \output to its normal
! 3192: % definition right away. (We hope \balancecolumns will never be
! 3193: % called on to balance too much material, but if it is, this makes
! 3194: % the output somewhat more palatable.)
! 3195: \global\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}%
! 3196: }%
! 3197: \eject
! 3198: \endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns
! 3199: %
! 3200: % \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted
! 3201: % the current page. We're now back to normal single-column
! 3202: % typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize (after the
! 3203: % \endgroup where \vsize got restored).
! 3204: \pagegoal = \vsize
! 3205: }
! 3206: \def\balancecolumns{%
! 3207: % Called at the end of the double column material.
! 3208: \setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox255}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120.
! 3209: \dimen@ = \ht0
! 3210: \advance\dimen@ by \topskip
! 3211: \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip
! 3212: \divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to
! 3213: %debug\message{final 2-column material height=\the\ht0, target=\the\dimen@.}%
! 3214: \splittopskip = \topskip
! 3215: % Loop until we get a decent breakpoint.
! 3216: {%
! 3217: \vbadness = 10000
! 3218: \loop
! 3219: \global\setbox3 = \copy0
! 3220: \global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@
! 3221: \ifdim\ht3>\dimen@
! 3222: \global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt
! 3223: \repeat
! 3224: }%
! 3225: %debug\message{split to \the\dimen@, column heights: \the\ht1, \the\ht3.}%
! 3226: \setbox0=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox1}%
! 3227: \setbox2=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox3}%
! 3228: %
! 3229: \pagesofar
! 3230: }
! 3231: \catcode`\@ = \other
! 3232:
! 3233:
! 3234: \message{sectioning,}
! 3235: % Chapters, sections, etc.
! 3236:
! 3237: \newcount\chapno
! 3238: \newcount\secno \secno=0
! 3239: \newcount\subsecno \subsecno=0
! 3240: \newcount\subsubsecno \subsubsecno=0
! 3241:
! 3242: % This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ...
! 3243: \newcount\appendixno \appendixno = `\@
! 3244: % \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno}
! 3245: % We do the following for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual
! 3246: % letter in the expansion, not just typeset.
! 3247: \def\appendixletter{%
! 3248: \ifnum\appendixno=`A A%
! 3249: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B%
! 3250: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`C C%
! 3251: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`D D%
! 3252: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`E E%
! 3253: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`F F%
! 3254: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`G G%
! 3255: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`H H%
! 3256: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`I I%
! 3257: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`J J%
! 3258: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`K K%
! 3259: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`L L%
! 3260: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`M M%
! 3261: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`N N%
! 3262: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`O O%
! 3263: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`P P%
! 3264: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Q Q%
! 3265: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`R R%
! 3266: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`S S%
! 3267: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`T T%
! 3268: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`U U%
! 3269: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`V V%
! 3270: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`W W%
! 3271: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`X X%
! 3272: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Y Y%
! 3273: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Z Z%
! 3274: % The \the is necessary, despite appearances, because \appendixletter is
! 3275: % expanded while writing the .toc file. \char\appendixno is not
! 3276: % expandable, thus it is written literally, thus all appendixes come out
! 3277: % with the same letter (or @) in the toc without it.
! 3278: \else\char\the\appendixno
! 3279: \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
! 3280: \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}
! 3281:
! 3282: % Each @chapter defines this as the name of the chapter.
! 3283: % page headings and footings can use it. @section does likewise.
! 3284: \def\thischapter{}
! 3285: \def\thissection{}
! 3286:
! 3287: \newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level
! 3288: \newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raise/lowersections modify this count
! 3289:
! 3290: % @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc.
! 3291: \def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1}
! 3292: \let\up=\raisesections % original BFox name
! 3293:
! 3294: % @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc.
! 3295: \def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1}
! 3296: \let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name
! 3297:
! 3298: % Choose a numbered-heading macro
! 3299: % #1 is heading level if unmodified by @raisesections or @lowersections
! 3300: % #2 is text for heading
! 3301: \def\numhead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1
! 3302: \ifcase\absseclevel
! 3303: \chapterzzz{#2}
! 3304: \or
! 3305: \seczzz{#2}
! 3306: \or
! 3307: \numberedsubseczzz{#2}
! 3308: \or
! 3309: \numberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
! 3310: \else
! 3311: \ifnum \absseclevel<0
! 3312: \chapterzzz{#2}
! 3313: \else
! 3314: \numberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
! 3315: \fi
! 3316: \fi
! 3317: }
! 3318:
! 3319: % like \numhead, but chooses appendix heading levels
! 3320: \def\apphead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1
! 3321: \ifcase\absseclevel
! 3322: \appendixzzz{#2}
! 3323: \or
! 3324: \appendixsectionzzz{#2}
! 3325: \or
! 3326: \appendixsubseczzz{#2}
! 3327: \or
! 3328: \appendixsubsubseczzz{#2}
! 3329: \else
! 3330: \ifnum \absseclevel<0
! 3331: \appendixzzz{#2}
! 3332: \else
! 3333: \appendixsubsubseczzz{#2}
! 3334: \fi
! 3335: \fi
! 3336: }
! 3337:
! 3338: % like \numhead, but chooses numberless heading levels
! 3339: \def\unnmhead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1
! 3340: \ifcase\absseclevel
! 3341: \unnumberedzzz{#2}
! 3342: \or
! 3343: \unnumberedseczzz{#2}
! 3344: \or
! 3345: \unnumberedsubseczzz{#2}
! 3346: \or
! 3347: \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
! 3348: \else
! 3349: \ifnum \absseclevel<0
! 3350: \unnumberedzzz{#2}
! 3351: \else
! 3352: \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
! 3353: \fi
! 3354: \fi
! 3355: }
! 3356:
! 3357: % @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered.
! 3358: \def\thischaptername{No Chapter Title}
! 3359: \outer\def\chapter{\parsearg\chapteryyy}
! 3360: \def\chapteryyy #1{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz
! 3361: \def\chapterzzz #1{%
! 3362: \secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0
! 3363: \global\advance \chapno by 1 \message{\putwordChapter\space \the\chapno}%
! 3364: \chapmacro {#1}{\the\chapno}%
! 3365: \gdef\thissection{#1}%
! 3366: \gdef\thischaptername{#1}%
! 3367: % We don't substitute the actual chapter name into \thischapter
! 3368: % because we don't want its macros evaluated now.
! 3369: \xdef\thischapter{\putwordChapter{} \the\chapno: \noexpand\thischaptername}%
! 3370: \toks0 = {#1}%
! 3371: \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash chapentry{\the\toks0}%
! 3372: {\the\chapno}}}%
! 3373: \temp
! 3374: \donoderef
! 3375: \global\let\section = \numberedsec
! 3376: \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
! 3377: \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
! 3378: }
! 3379:
! 3380: \outer\def\appendix{\parsearg\appendixyyy}
! 3381: \def\appendixyyy #1{\apphead0{#1}} % normally apphead0 calls appendixzzz
! 3382: \def\appendixzzz #1{%
! 3383: \secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0
! 3384: \global\advance \appendixno by 1
! 3385: \message{\putwordAppendix\space \appendixletter}%
! 3386: \chapmacro {#1}{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter}%
! 3387: \gdef\thissection{#1}%
! 3388: \gdef\thischaptername{#1}%
! 3389: \xdef\thischapter{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter: \noexpand\thischaptername}%
! 3390: \toks0 = {#1}%
! 3391: \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash chapentry{\the\toks0}%
! 3392: {\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter}}}%
! 3393: \temp
! 3394: \appendixnoderef
! 3395: \global\let\section = \appendixsec
! 3396: \global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec
! 3397: \global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec
! 3398: }
! 3399:
! 3400: % @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered.
! 3401: \outer\def\centerchap{\parsearg\centerchapyyy}
! 3402: \def\centerchapyyy #1{{\let\unnumbchapmacro=\centerchapmacro \unnumberedyyy{#1}}}
! 3403:
! 3404: % @top is like @unnumbered.
! 3405: \outer\def\top{\parsearg\unnumberedyyy}
! 3406:
! 3407: \outer\def\unnumbered{\parsearg\unnumberedyyy}
! 3408: \def\unnumberedyyy #1{\unnmhead0{#1}} % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz
! 3409: \def\unnumberedzzz #1{%
! 3410: \secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0
! 3411: %
! 3412: % This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the
! 3413: % argument to \message. Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX
! 3414: % expanded them. For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX
! 3415: % expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant
! 3416: % to be executed, not expanded).
! 3417: %
! 3418: % Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear
! 3419: % as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself. We use
! 3420: % \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once,
! 3421: % simply yielding the contents of <toks register>. (We also do this for
! 3422: % the toc entries.)
! 3423: \toks0 = {#1}\message{(\the\toks0)}%
! 3424: %
! 3425: \unnumbchapmacro {#1}%
! 3426: \gdef\thischapter{#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
! 3427: \toks0 = {#1}%
! 3428: \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbchapentry{\the\toks0}}}%
! 3429: \temp
! 3430: \unnumbnoderef
! 3431: \global\let\section = \unnumberedsec
! 3432: \global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec
! 3433: \global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec
! 3434: }
! 3435:
! 3436: % Sections.
! 3437: \outer\def\numberedsec{\parsearg\secyyy}
! 3438: \def\secyyy #1{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz
! 3439: \def\seczzz #1{%
! 3440: \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \secno by 1 %
! 3441: \gdef\thissection{#1}\secheading {#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}%
! 3442: \toks0 = {#1}%
! 3443: \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash secentry{\the\toks0}%
! 3444: {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}}}%
! 3445: \temp
! 3446: \donoderef
! 3447: \nobreak
! 3448: }
! 3449:
! 3450: \outer\def\appendixsection{\parsearg\appendixsecyyy}
! 3451: \outer\def\appendixsec{\parsearg\appendixsecyyy}
! 3452: \def\appendixsecyyy #1{\apphead1{#1}} % normally calls appendixsectionzzz
! 3453: \def\appendixsectionzzz #1{%
! 3454: \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \secno by 1 %
! 3455: \gdef\thissection{#1}\secheading {#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}%
! 3456: \toks0 = {#1}%
! 3457: \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash secentry{\the\toks0}%
! 3458: {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}}}%
! 3459: \temp
! 3460: \appendixnoderef
! 3461: \nobreak
! 3462: }
! 3463:
! 3464: \outer\def\unnumberedsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsecyyy}
! 3465: \def\unnumberedsecyyy #1{\unnmhead1{#1}} % normally calls unnumberedseczzz
! 3466: \def\unnumberedseczzz #1{%
! 3467: \plainsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
! 3468: \toks0 = {#1}%
! 3469: \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbsecentry{\the\toks0}}}%
! 3470: \temp
! 3471: \unnumbnoderef
! 3472: \nobreak
! 3473: }
! 3474:
! 3475: % Subsections.
! 3476: \outer\def\numberedsubsec{\parsearg\numberedsubsecyyy}
! 3477: \def\numberedsubsecyyy #1{\numhead2{#1}} % normally calls numberedsubseczzz
! 3478: \def\numberedsubseczzz #1{%
! 3479: \gdef\thissection{#1}\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \subsecno by 1 %
! 3480: \subsecheading {#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}%
! 3481: \toks0 = {#1}%
! 3482: \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsecentry{\the\toks0}%
! 3483: {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}}}%
! 3484: \temp
! 3485: \donoderef
! 3486: \nobreak
! 3487: }
! 3488:
! 3489: \outer\def\appendixsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsecyyy}
! 3490: \def\appendixsubsecyyy #1{\apphead2{#1}} % normally calls appendixsubseczzz
! 3491: \def\appendixsubseczzz #1{%
! 3492: \gdef\thissection{#1}\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \subsecno by 1 %
! 3493: \subsecheading {#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}%
! 3494: \toks0 = {#1}%
! 3495: \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsecentry{\the\toks0}%
! 3496: {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}}}%
! 3497: \temp
! 3498: \appendixnoderef
! 3499: \nobreak
! 3500: }
! 3501:
! 3502: \outer\def\unnumberedsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsecyyy}
! 3503: \def\unnumberedsubsecyyy #1{\unnmhead2{#1}} %normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz
! 3504: \def\unnumberedsubseczzz #1{%
! 3505: \plainsubsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
! 3506: \toks0 = {#1}%
! 3507: \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbsubsecentry%
! 3508: {\the\toks0}}}%
! 3509: \temp
! 3510: \unnumbnoderef
! 3511: \nobreak
! 3512: }
! 3513:
! 3514: % Subsubsections.
! 3515: \outer\def\numberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\numberedsubsubsecyyy}
! 3516: \def\numberedsubsubsecyyy #1{\numhead3{#1}} % normally numberedsubsubseczzz
! 3517: \def\numberedsubsubseczzz #1{%
! 3518: \gdef\thissection{#1}\global\advance \subsubsecno by 1 %
! 3519: \subsubsecheading {#1}
! 3520: {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}%
! 3521: \toks0 = {#1}%
! 3522: \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsubsecentry{\the\toks0}%
! 3523: {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}}}%
! 3524: \temp
! 3525: \donoderef
! 3526: \nobreak
! 3527: }
! 3528:
! 3529: \outer\def\appendixsubsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsubsecyyy}
! 3530: \def\appendixsubsubsecyyy #1{\apphead3{#1}} % normally appendixsubsubseczzz
! 3531: \def\appendixsubsubseczzz #1{%
! 3532: \gdef\thissection{#1}\global\advance \subsubsecno by 1 %
! 3533: \subsubsecheading {#1}
! 3534: {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}%
! 3535: \toks0 = {#1}%
! 3536: \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsubsecentry{\the\toks0}%
! 3537: {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}}}%
! 3538: \temp
! 3539: \appendixnoderef
! 3540: \nobreak
! 3541: }
! 3542:
! 3543: \outer\def\unnumberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsubsecyyy}
! 3544: \def\unnumberedsubsubsecyyy #1{\unnmhead3{#1}} %normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz
! 3545: \def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz #1{%
! 3546: \plainsubsubsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
! 3547: \toks0 = {#1}%
! 3548: \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbsubsubsecentry%
! 3549: {\the\toks0}}}%
! 3550: \temp
! 3551: \unnumbnoderef
! 3552: \nobreak
! 3553: }
! 3554:
! 3555: % These are variants which are not "outer", so they can appear in @ifinfo.
! 3556: % Actually, they should now be obsolete; ordinary section commands should work.
! 3557: \def\infotop{\parsearg\unnumberedzzz}
! 3558: \def\infounnumbered{\parsearg\unnumberedzzz}
! 3559: \def\infounnumberedsec{\parsearg\unnumberedseczzz}
! 3560: \def\infounnumberedsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubseczzz}
! 3561: \def\infounnumberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsubseczzz}
! 3562:
! 3563: \def\infoappendix{\parsearg\appendixzzz}
! 3564: \def\infoappendixsec{\parsearg\appendixseczzz}
! 3565: \def\infoappendixsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubseczzz}
! 3566: \def\infoappendixsubsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsubseczzz}
! 3567:
! 3568: \def\infochapter{\parsearg\chapterzzz}
! 3569: \def\infosection{\parsearg\sectionzzz}
! 3570: \def\infosubsection{\parsearg\subsectionzzz}
! 3571: \def\infosubsubsection{\parsearg\subsubsectionzzz}
! 3572:
! 3573: % These macros control what the section commands do, according
! 3574: % to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered).
! 3575: % Define them by default for a numbered chapter.
! 3576: \global\let\section = \numberedsec
! 3577: \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
! 3578: \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
! 3579:
! 3580: % Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading
! 3581:
! 3582: % NOTE on use of \vbox for chapter headings, section headings, and such:
! 3583: % 1) We use \vbox rather than the earlier \line to permit
! 3584: % overlong headings to fold.
! 3585: % 2) \hyphenpenalty is set to 10000 because hyphenation in a
! 3586: % heading is obnoxious; this forbids it.
! 3587: % 3) Likewise, headings look best if no \parindent is used, and
! 3588: % if justification is not attempted. Hence \raggedright.
! 3589:
! 3590:
! 3591: \def\majorheading{\parsearg\majorheadingzzz}
! 3592: \def\majorheadingzzz #1{%
! 3593: {\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }%
! 3594: {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
! 3595: \parindent=0pt\raggedright
! 3596: \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\penalty 200}
! 3597:
! 3598: \def\chapheading{\parsearg\chapheadingzzz}
! 3599: \def\chapheadingzzz #1{\chapbreak %
! 3600: {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
! 3601: \parindent=0pt\raggedright
! 3602: \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\penalty 200}
! 3603:
! 3604: % @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading.
! 3605: \def\heading{\parsearg\plainsecheading}
! 3606: \def\subheading{\parsearg\plainsubsecheading}
! 3607: \def\subsubheading{\parsearg\plainsubsubsecheading}
! 3608:
! 3609: % These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only
! 3610: % (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it),
! 3611: % given all the information in convenient, parsed form.
! 3612:
! 3613: %%% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative)
! 3614: \def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi}
! 3615:
! 3616: \def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname}
! 3617:
! 3618: %%% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it
! 3619: % Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed)
! 3620:
! 3621: \newskip\chapheadingskip
! 3622:
! 3623: \def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}}
! 3624: \def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject}
! 3625: \def\chapoddpage{\chappager \ifodd\pageno \else \hbox to 0pt{} \chappager\fi}
! 3626:
! 3627: \def\setchapternewpage #1 {\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname}
! 3628:
! 3629: \def\CHAPPAGoff{%
! 3630: \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
! 3631: \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak
! 3632: \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager}
! 3633:
! 3634: \def\CHAPPAGon{%
! 3635: \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
! 3636: \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager
! 3637: \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager
! 3638: \global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}}
! 3639:
! 3640: \def\CHAPPAGodd{
! 3641: \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
! 3642: \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage
! 3643: \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage
! 3644: \global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}}
! 3645:
! 3646: \CHAPPAGon
! 3647:
! 3648: \def\CHAPFplain{
! 3649: \global\let\chapmacro=\chfplain
! 3650: \global\let\unnumbchapmacro=\unnchfplain
! 3651: \global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfplain}
! 3652:
! 3653: % Plain chapter opening.
! 3654: % #1 is the text, #2 the chapter number or empty if unnumbered.
! 3655: \def\chfplain#1#2{%
! 3656: \pchapsepmacro
! 3657: {%
! 3658: \chapfonts \rm
! 3659: \def\chapnum{#2}%
! 3660: \setbox0 = \hbox{#2\ifx\chapnum\empty\else\enspace\fi}%
! 3661: \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright
! 3662: \hangindent = \wd0 \centerparametersmaybe
! 3663: \unhbox0 #1\par}%
! 3664: }%
! 3665: \nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title
! 3666: \nobreak
! 3667: }
! 3668:
! 3669: % Plain opening for unnumbered.
! 3670: \def\unnchfplain#1{\chfplain{#1}{}}
! 3671:
! 3672: % @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered.
! 3673: \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
! 3674: \def\centerchfplain#1{{%
! 3675: \def\centerparametersmaybe{%
! 3676: \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip
! 3677: \leftskip = \rightskip
! 3678: \parfillskip = 0pt
! 3679: }%
! 3680: \chfplain{#1}{}%
! 3681: }}
! 3682:
! 3683: \CHAPFplain % The default
! 3684:
! 3685: \def\unnchfopen #1{%
! 3686: \chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
! 3687: \parindent=0pt\raggedright
! 3688: \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
! 3689: }
! 3690:
! 3691: \def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts
! 3692: \vbox to 3in{\vfil \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #2} \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #1} \vfil}}%
! 3693: \par\penalty 5000 %
! 3694: }
! 3695:
! 3696: \def\centerchfopen #1{%
! 3697: \chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
! 3698: \parindent=0pt
! 3699: \hfill {\rm #1}\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
! 3700: }
! 3701:
! 3702: \def\CHAPFopen{
! 3703: \global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen
! 3704: \global\let\unnumbchapmacro=\unnchfopen
! 3705: \global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfopen}
! 3706:
! 3707:
! 3708: % Section titles.
! 3709: \newskip\secheadingskip
! 3710: \def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip {-1000}}
! 3711: \def\secheading#1#2#3{\sectionheading{sec}{#2.#3}{#1}}
! 3712: \def\plainsecheading#1{\sectionheading{sec}{}{#1}}
! 3713:
! 3714: % Subsection titles.
! 3715: \newskip \subsecheadingskip
! 3716: \def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip {-500}}
! 3717: \def\subsecheading#1#2#3#4{\sectionheading{subsec}{#2.#3.#4}{#1}}
! 3718: \def\plainsubsecheading#1{\sectionheading{subsec}{}{#1}}
! 3719:
! 3720: % Subsubsection titles.
! 3721: \let\subsubsecheadingskip = \subsecheadingskip
! 3722: \let\subsubsecheadingbreak = \subsecheadingbreak
! 3723: \def\subsubsecheading#1#2#3#4#5{\sectionheading{subsubsec}{#2.#3.#4.#5}{#1}}
! 3724: \def\plainsubsubsecheading#1{\sectionheading{subsubsec}{}{#1}}
! 3725:
! 3726:
! 3727: % Print any size section title.
! 3728: %
! 3729: % #1 is the section type (sec/subsec/subsubsec), #2 is the section
! 3730: % number (maybe empty), #3 the text.
! 3731: \def\sectionheading#1#2#3{%
! 3732: {%
! 3733: \expandafter\advance\csname #1headingskip\endcsname by \parskip
! 3734: \csname #1headingbreak\endcsname
! 3735: }%
! 3736: {%
! 3737: % Switch to the right set of fonts.
! 3738: \csname #1fonts\endcsname \rm
! 3739: %
! 3740: % Only insert the separating space if we have a section number.
! 3741: \def\secnum{#2}%
! 3742: \setbox0 = \hbox{#2\ifx\secnum\empty\else\enspace\fi}%
! 3743: %
! 3744: \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright
! 3745: \hangindent = \wd0 % zero if no section number
! 3746: \unhbox0 #3}%
! 3747: }%
! 3748: \ifdim\parskip<10pt \nobreak\kern10pt\nobreak\kern-\parskip\fi \nobreak
! 3749: }
! 3750:
! 3751:
! 3752: \message{toc,}
! 3753: % Table of contents.
! 3754: \newwrite\tocfile
! 3755:
! 3756: % Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary.
! 3757: % Called from @chapter, etc. We supply {\folio} at the end of the
! 3758: % argument, which will end up as the last argument to the \...entry macro.
! 3759: %
! 3760: % We open the .toc file here instead of at @setfilename or any other
! 3761: % given time so that @contents can be put in the document anywhere.
! 3762: %
! 3763: \newif\iftocfileopened
! 3764: \def\writetocentry#1{%
! 3765: \iftocfileopened\else
! 3766: \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc
! 3767: \global\tocfileopenedtrue
! 3768: \fi
! 3769: \iflinks \write\tocfile{#1{\folio}}\fi
! 3770: }
! 3771:
! 3772: \newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in
! 3773: \newcount\savepageno
! 3774: \newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1
! 3775:
! 3776: % Finish up the main text and prepare to read what we've written
! 3777: % to \tocfile.
! 3778: %
! 3779: \def\startcontents#1{%
! 3780: % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should
! 3781: % start on an odd page, unlike chapters. Thus, we maintain
! 3782: % \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro.
! 3783: % From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege@matematik.su.se>
! 3784: \contentsalignmacro
! 3785: \immediate\closeout\tocfile
! 3786: %
! 3787: % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline.
! 3788: % It is abundantly clear what they are.
! 3789: \unnumbchapmacro{#1}\def\thischapter{}%
! 3790: \savepageno = \pageno
! 3791: \begingroup % Set up to handle contents files properly.
! 3792: \catcode`\\=0 \catcode`\{=1 \catcode`\}=2 \catcode`\@=11
! 3793: % We can't do this, because then an actual ^ in a section
! 3794: % title fails, e.g., @chapter ^ -- exponentiation. --karl, 9jul97.
! 3795: %\catcode`\^=7 % to see ^^e4 as \"a etc. juha@piuha.ydi.vtt.fi
! 3796: \raggedbottom % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom.
! 3797: \advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length.
! 3798: %
! 3799: % Roman numerals for page numbers.
! 3800: \ifnum \pageno>0 \pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi
! 3801: }
! 3802:
! 3803:
! 3804: % Normal (long) toc.
! 3805: \def\contents{%
! 3806: \startcontents{\putwordTOC}%
! 3807: \openin 1 \jobname.toc
! 3808: \ifeof 1 \else
! 3809: \closein 1
! 3810: \input \jobname.toc
! 3811: \fi
! 3812: \vfill \eject
! 3813: \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
! 3814: \pdfmakeoutlines
! 3815: \endgroup
! 3816: \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
! 3817: \pageno = \savepageno
! 3818: }
! 3819:
! 3820: % And just the chapters.
! 3821: \def\summarycontents{%
! 3822: \startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}%
! 3823: %
! 3824: \let\chapentry = \shortchapentry
! 3825: \let\unnumbchapentry = \shortunnumberedentry
! 3826: % We want a true roman here for the page numbers.
! 3827: \secfonts
! 3828: \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf \let\sl=\shortcontsl
! 3829: \rm
! 3830: \hyphenpenalty = 10000
! 3831: \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little.
! 3832: \def\secentry ##1##2##3##4{}
! 3833: \def\unnumbsecentry ##1##2{}
! 3834: \def\subsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{}
! 3835: \def\unnumbsubsecentry ##1##2{}
! 3836: \def\subsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5##6{}
! 3837: \def\unnumbsubsubsecentry ##1##2{}
! 3838: \openin 1 \jobname.toc
! 3839: \ifeof 1 \else
! 3840: \closein 1
! 3841: \input \jobname.toc
! 3842: \fi
! 3843: \vfill \eject
! 3844: \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
! 3845: \endgroup
! 3846: \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
! 3847: \pageno = \savepageno
! 3848: }
! 3849: \let\shortcontents = \summarycontents
! 3850:
! 3851: \ifpdf
! 3852: \pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines}%
! 3853: \fi
! 3854:
! 3855: % These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents.
! 3856: % The first argument is the chapter or section name.
! 3857: % The last argument is the page number.
! 3858: % The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ...
! 3859:
! 3860: % Chapter-level things, for both the long and short contents.
! 3861: \def\chapentry#1#2#3{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#3}}
! 3862:
! 3863: % See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings
! 3864: \def\shortchapentry#1#2#3{%
! 3865: \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#3\egroup}%
! 3866: }
! 3867:
! 3868: % Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents.
! 3869: % The arg is, e.g. `Appendix A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter.
! 3870: % We could simplify the code here by writing out an \appendixentry
! 3871: % command in the toc file for appendices, instead of using \chapentry
! 3872: % for both, but it doesn't seem worth it.
! 3873: %
! 3874: \newdimen\shortappendixwidth
! 3875: %
! 3876: \def\shortchaplabel#1{%
! 3877: % Compute width of word "Appendix", may change with language.
! 3878: \setbox0 = \hbox{\shortcontrm \putwordAppendix}%
! 3879: \shortappendixwidth = \wd0
! 3880: %
! 3881: % We typeset #1 in a box of constant width, regardless of the text of
! 3882: % #1, so the chapter titles will come out aligned.
! 3883: \setbox0 = \hbox{#1}%
! 3884: \dimen0 = \ifdim\wd0 > \shortappendixwidth \shortappendixwidth \else 0pt \fi
! 3885: %
! 3886: % This space should be plenty, since a single number is .5em, and the
! 3887: % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts.
! 3888: % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after
! 3889: % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.)
! 3890: \advance\dimen0 by 1.1em
! 3891: \hbox to \dimen0{#1\hfil}%
! 3892: }
! 3893:
! 3894: \def\unnumbchapentry#1#2{\dochapentry{#1}{#2}}
! 3895: \def\shortunnumberedentry#1#2{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#2\egroup}}
! 3896:
! 3897: % Sections.
! 3898: \def\secentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2.#3\labelspace#1}{#4}}
! 3899: \def\unnumbsecentry#1#2{\dosecentry{#1}{#2}}
! 3900:
! 3901: % Subsections.
! 3902: \def\subsecentry#1#2#3#4#5{\dosubsecentry{#2.#3.#4\labelspace#1}{#5}}
! 3903: \def\unnumbsubsecentry#1#2{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#2}}
! 3904:
! 3905: % And subsubsections.
! 3906: \def\subsubsecentry#1#2#3#4#5#6{%
! 3907: \dosubsubsecentry{#2.#3.#4.#5\labelspace#1}{#6}}
! 3908: \def\unnumbsubsubsecentry#1#2{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#2}}
! 3909:
! 3910: % This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels.
! 3911: \newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 3pc
! 3912:
! 3913: % Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the
! 3914: % page number.
! 3915: %
! 3916: % If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters
! 3917: % if at all possible; hence the \penalty.
! 3918: \def\dochapentry#1#2{%
! 3919: \penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip
! 3920: \begingroup
! 3921: \chapentryfonts
! 3922: \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
! 3923: \endgroup
! 3924: \nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip
! 3925: }
! 3926:
! 3927: \def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup
! 3928: \secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent
! 3929: \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
! 3930: \endgroup}
! 3931:
! 3932: \def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
! 3933: \subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent
! 3934: \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
! 3935: \endgroup}
! 3936:
! 3937: \def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
! 3938: \subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent
! 3939: \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
! 3940: \endgroup}
! 3941:
! 3942: % Final typesetting of a toc entry; we use the same \entry macro as for
! 3943: % the index entries, but we want to suppress hyphenation here. (We
! 3944: % can't do that in the \entry macro, since index entries might consist
! 3945: % of hyphenated-identifiers-that-do-not-fit-on-a-line-and-nothing-else.)
! 3946: \def\tocentry#1#2{\begingroup
! 3947: \vskip 0pt plus1pt % allow a little stretch for the sake of nice page breaks
! 3948: % Do not use \turnoffactive in these arguments. Since the toc is
! 3949: % typeset in cmr, so characters such as _ would come out wrong; we
! 3950: % have to do the usual translation tricks.
! 3951: \entry{#1}{#2}%
! 3952: \endgroup}
! 3953:
! 3954: % Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title.
! 3955: \def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax}
! 3956:
! 3957: \def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}}
! 3958: \def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}}
! 3959:
! 3960: \def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm}
! 3961: \def\secentryfonts{\textfonts}
! 3962: \let\subsecentryfonts = \textfonts
! 3963: \let\subsubsecentryfonts = \textfonts
! 3964:
! 3965:
! 3966: \message{environments,}
! 3967: % @foo ... @end foo.
! 3968:
! 3969: % Since these characters are used in examples, it should be an even number of
! 3970: % \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em.
! 3971: % Furthermore, these definitions must come after we define our fonts.
! 3972: \newbox\dblarrowbox \newbox\longdblarrowbox
! 3973: \newbox\pushcharbox \newbox\bullbox
! 3974: \newbox\equivbox \newbox\errorbox
! 3975:
! 3976: %{\tentt
! 3977: %\global\setbox\dblarrowbox = \hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}
! 3978: %\global\setbox\longdblarrowbox = \hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}
! 3979: %\global\setbox\pushcharbox = \hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}
! 3980: %\global\setbox\equivbox = \hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}
! 3981: % Adapted from the manmac format (p.420 of TeXbook)
! 3982: %\global\setbox\bullbox = \hbox to 1em{\kern.15em\vrule height .75ex width .85ex
! 3983: % depth .1ex\hfil}
! 3984: %}
! 3985:
! 3986: % @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}.
! 3987: \def\point{$\star$}
! 3988: \def\result{\leavevmode\raise.15ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}}
! 3989: \def\expansion{\leavevmode\raise.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}}
! 3990: \def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}}
! 3991: \def\equiv{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}}
! 3992:
! 3993: % Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit.
! 3994: {\tentt \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box.
! 3995: \dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules
! 3996: % The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.)
! 3997: \setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \tensf error\kern-1.5pt}
! 3998:
! 3999: \global\setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil
! 4000: \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right.
! 4001: \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules.
! 4002: \vbox{
! 4003: \hrule height\dimen2
! 4004: \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt % Space to left of text.
! 4005: \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below.
! 4006: \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right.
! 4007: \hrule height\dimen2}
! 4008: \hfil}
! 4009:
! 4010: % The @error{} command.
! 4011: \def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox}
! 4012:
! 4013: % @tex ... @end tex escapes into raw Tex temporarily.
! 4014: % One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works.
! 4015: % But \@ or @@ will get a plain tex @ character.
! 4016:
! 4017: \def\tex{\begingroup
! 4018: \catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2
! 4019: \catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6
! 4020: \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=13 \let~=\tie
! 4021: \catcode `\%=14
! 4022: \catcode 43=12 % plus
! 4023: \catcode`\"=12
! 4024: \catcode`\==12
! 4025: \catcode`\|=12
! 4026: \catcode`\<=12
! 4027: \catcode`\>=12
! 4028: \escapechar=`\\
! 4029: %
! 4030: \let\b=\ptexb
! 4031: \let\bullet=\ptexbullet
! 4032: \let\c=\ptexc
! 4033: \let\,=\ptexcomma
! 4034: \let\.=\ptexdot
! 4035: \let\dots=\ptexdots
! 4036: \let\equiv=\ptexequiv
! 4037: \let\!=\ptexexclam
! 4038: \let\i=\ptexi
! 4039: \let\{=\ptexlbrace
! 4040: \let\+=\tabalign
! 4041: \let\}=\ptexrbrace
! 4042: \let\*=\ptexstar
! 4043: \let\t=\ptext
! 4044: %
! 4045: \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}%
! 4046: \def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}%
! 4047: \def\@{@}%
! 4048: \let\Etex=\endgroup}
! 4049:
! 4050: % Define @lisp ... @endlisp.
! 4051: % @lisp does a \begingroup so it can rebind things,
! 4052: % including the definition of @endlisp (which normally is erroneous).
! 4053:
! 4054: % Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp.
! 4055: \newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in
! 4056:
! 4057: % This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other
! 4058: % such environments. \null is better than a space, since it doesn't
! 4059: % have any width.
! 4060: \def\lisppar{\null\endgraf}
! 4061:
! 4062: % Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword
! 4063: % space in the output. Don't allow a line break at this space, as this
! 4064: % is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input
! 4065: % should produce a line of output anyway.
! 4066: %
! 4067: {\obeyspaces %
! 4068: \gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie}}
! 4069:
! 4070: % Define \obeyedspace to be our active space, whatever it is. This is
! 4071: % for use in \parsearg.
! 4072: {\sepspaces%
! 4073: \global\let\obeyedspace= }
! 4074:
! 4075: % This space is always present above and below environments.
! 4076: \newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt
! 4077:
! 4078: % Make spacing and below environment symmetrical. We use \parskip here
! 4079: % to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip
! 4080: % is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the
! 4081: % start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip
! 4082: %
! 4083: \def\aboveenvbreak{{\advance\envskipamount by \parskip
! 4084: \endgraf \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount
! 4085: \removelastskip \penalty-50 \vskip\envskipamount \fi}}
! 4086:
! 4087: \let\afterenvbreak = \aboveenvbreak
! 4088:
! 4089: % \nonarrowing is a flag. If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins.
! 4090: \let\nonarrowing=\relax
! 4091:
! 4092: % @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around
! 4093: % environment contents.
! 4094: \font\circle=lcircle10
! 4095: \newdimen\circthick
! 4096: \newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner
! 4097: \newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip
! 4098: \circthick=\fontdimen8\circle
! 4099: %
! 4100: \def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth
! 4101: \def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}}
! 4102: \def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}}
! 4103: \def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}}
! 4104: \def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
! 4105: \ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr
! 4106: \hskip\rskip}}
! 4107: \def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
! 4108: \cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr
! 4109: \hskip\rskip}}
! 4110: %
! 4111: \newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip
! 4112:
! 4113: \long\def\cartouche{%
! 4114: \begingroup
! 4115: \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip
! 4116: \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt %we want these *outside*.
! 4117: \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip
! 4118: \advance\cartinner by-\rskip
! 4119: \cartouter=\hsize
! 4120: \advance\cartouter by 18.4pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either
! 4121: % side, and for 6pt waste from
! 4122: % each corner char, and rule thickness
! 4123: \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip
! 4124: % Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin.
! 4125: \let\nonarrowing=\comment
! 4126: \vbox\bgroup
! 4127: \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt
! 4128: \carttop
! 4129: \hbox\bgroup
! 4130: \hskip\lskip
! 4131: \vrule\kern3pt
! 4132: \vbox\bgroup
! 4133: \hsize=\cartinner
! 4134: \kern3pt
! 4135: \begingroup
! 4136: \baselineskip=\normbskip
! 4137: \lineskip=\normlskip
! 4138: \parskip=\normpskip
! 4139: \vskip -\parskip
! 4140: \def\Ecartouche{%
! 4141: \endgroup
! 4142: \kern3pt
! 4143: \egroup
! 4144: \kern3pt\vrule
! 4145: \hskip\rskip
! 4146: \egroup
! 4147: \cartbot
! 4148: \egroup
! 4149: \endgroup
! 4150: }}
! 4151:
! 4152:
! 4153: % This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants,
! 4154: % inside a group.
! 4155: \def\nonfillstart{%
! 4156: \aboveenvbreak
! 4157: \inENV % This group ends at the end of the body
! 4158: \hfuzz = 12pt % Don't be fussy
! 4159: \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens.
! 4160: \singlespace
! 4161: \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines
! 4162: \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output
! 4163: \parskip = 0pt
! 4164: \parindent = 0pt
! 4165: \emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes
! 4166: % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing
! 4167: % at next level down.
! 4168: \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
! 4169: \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing
! 4170: \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing
! 4171: \let\exdent=\nofillexdent
! 4172: \let\nonarrowing=\relax
! 4173: \fi
! 4174: }
! 4175:
! 4176: % Define the \E... control sequence only if we are inside the particular
! 4177: % environment, so the error checking in \end will work.
! 4178: %
! 4179: % To end an @example-like environment, we first end the paragraph (via
! 4180: % \afterenvbreak's vertical glue), and then the group. That way we keep
! 4181: % the zero \parskip that the environments set -- \parskip glue will be
! 4182: % inserted at the beginning of the next paragraph in the document, after
! 4183: % the environment.
! 4184: %
! 4185: \def\nonfillfinish{\afterenvbreak\endgroup}
! 4186:
! 4187: % @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font.
! 4188: \def\lisp{\begingroup
! 4189: \nonfillstart
! 4190: \let\Elisp = \nonfillfinish
! 4191: \tt
! 4192: \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special.
! 4193: \gobble % eat return
! 4194: }
! 4195:
! 4196: % @example: Same as @lisp.
! 4197: \def\example{\begingroup \def\Eexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp}
! 4198:
! 4199: % @small... is usually equivalent to the non-small (@smallbook
! 4200: % redefines). We must call \example (or whatever) last in the
! 4201: % definition, since it reads the return following the @example (or
! 4202: % whatever) command.
! 4203: %
! 4204: % This actually allows (for example) @end display inside an
! 4205: % @smalldisplay. Too bad, but makeinfo will catch the error anyway.
! 4206: %
! 4207: \def\smalldisplay{\begingroup\def\Esmalldisplay{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\display}
! 4208: \def\smallexample{\begingroup\def\Esmallexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp}
! 4209: \def\smallformat{\begingroup\def\Esmallformat{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\format}
! 4210: \def\smalllisp{\begingroup\def\Esmalllisp{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp}
! 4211:
! 4212: % Real @smallexample and @smalllisp (when @smallbook): use smaller fonts.
! 4213: % Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox.
! 4214: \def\smalllispx{\begingroup
! 4215: \def\Esmalllisp{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
! 4216: \def\Esmallexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
! 4217: \smallfonts
! 4218: \lisp
! 4219: }
! 4220:
! 4221: % @display: same as @lisp except keep current font.
! 4222: %
! 4223: \def\display{\begingroup
! 4224: \nonfillstart
! 4225: \let\Edisplay = \nonfillfinish
! 4226: \gobble
! 4227: }
! 4228:
! 4229: % @smalldisplay (when @smallbook): @display plus smaller fonts.
! 4230: %
! 4231: \def\smalldisplayx{\begingroup
! 4232: \def\Esmalldisplay{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
! 4233: \smallfonts \rm
! 4234: \display
! 4235: }
! 4236:
! 4237: % @format: same as @display except don't narrow margins.
! 4238: %
! 4239: \def\format{\begingroup
! 4240: \let\nonarrowing = t
! 4241: \nonfillstart
! 4242: \let\Eformat = \nonfillfinish
! 4243: \gobble
! 4244: }
! 4245:
! 4246: % @smallformat (when @smallbook): @format plus smaller fonts.
! 4247: %
! 4248: \def\smallformatx{\begingroup
! 4249: \def\Esmallformat{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
! 4250: \smallfonts \rm
! 4251: \format
! 4252: }
! 4253:
! 4254: % @flushleft (same as @format).
! 4255: %
! 4256: \def\flushleft{\begingroup \def\Eflushleft{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\format}
! 4257:
! 4258: % @flushright.
! 4259: %
! 4260: \def\flushright{\begingroup
! 4261: \let\nonarrowing = t
! 4262: \nonfillstart
! 4263: \let\Eflushright = \nonfillfinish
! 4264: \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill
! 4265: \gobble
! 4266: }
! 4267:
! 4268: % @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart)
! 4269: % and narrows the margins.
! 4270: %
! 4271: \def\quotation{%
! 4272: \begingroup\inENV %This group ends at the end of the @quotation body
! 4273: {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip
! 4274: \singlespace
! 4275: \parindent=0pt
! 4276: % We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're
! 4277: % doing normal filling. So to avoid extra space below the environment...
! 4278: \def\Equotation{\parskip = 0pt \nonfillfinish}%
! 4279: %
! 4280: % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down.
! 4281: \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
! 4282: \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing
! 4283: \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing
! 4284: \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing
! 4285: \let\nonarrowing = \relax
! 4286: \fi
! 4287: }
! 4288:
! 4289:
! 4290: \message{defuns,}
! 4291: % @defun etc.
! 4292:
! 4293: % Allow user to change definition object font (\df) internally
! 4294: \def\setdeffont #1 {\csname DEF#1\endcsname}
! 4295:
! 4296: \newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in
! 4297: \newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt
! 4298: \newskip\deftypemargin \deftypemargin=12pt
! 4299: \newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt
! 4300:
! 4301: \newcount\parencount
! 4302: % define \functionparens, which makes ( and ) and & do special things.
! 4303: % \functionparens affects the group it is contained in.
! 4304: \def\activeparens{%
! 4305: \catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active \catcode`\&=\active
! 4306: \catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active}
! 4307:
! 4308: % Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars.
! 4309: \let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = )
! 4310:
! 4311: {\activeparens % Now, smart parens don't turn on until &foo (see \amprm)
! 4312:
! 4313: % Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc. For example,
! 4314: % if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet,
! 4315: % so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence.
! 4316: \global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen
! 4317: \global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack
! 4318:
! 4319: \gdef\functionparens{\boldbrax\let&=\amprm\parencount=0 }
! 4320: \gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb}
! 4321: % This is used to turn on special parens
! 4322: % but make & act ordinary (given that it's active).
! 4323: \gdef\boldbraxnoamp{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb\let&=\ampnr}
! 4324:
! 4325: % Definitions of (, ) and & used in args for functions.
! 4326: % This is the definition of ( outside of all parentheses.
! 4327: \gdef\oprm#1 {{\rm\char`\(}#1 \bf \let(=\opnested
! 4328: \global\advance\parencount by 1
! 4329: }
! 4330: %
! 4331: % This is the definition of ( when already inside a level of parens.
! 4332: \gdef\opnested{\char`\(\global\advance\parencount by 1 }
! 4333: %
! 4334: \gdef\clrm{% Print a paren in roman if it is taking us back to depth of 0.
! 4335: % also in that case restore the outer-level definition of (.
! 4336: \ifnum \parencount=1 {\rm \char `\)}\sl \let(=\oprm \else \char `\) \fi
! 4337: \global\advance \parencount by -1 }
! 4338: % If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards
! 4339: \gdef\amprm#1 {{\rm\}\let(=\oprm \let)=\clrm\ }
! 4340: %
! 4341: \gdef\normalparens{\boldbrax\let&=\ampnr}
! 4342: } % End of definition inside \activeparens
! 4343: %% These parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than the
! 4344: %% contained text. This is especially needed for [ and ]
! 4345: \def\opnr{{\sf\char`\(}\global\advance\parencount by 1 }
! 4346: \def\clnr{{\sf\char`\)}\global\advance\parencount by -1 }
! 4347: \let\ampnr = \&
! 4348: \def\lbrb{{\bf\char`\[}}
! 4349: \def\rbrb{{\bf\char`\]}}
! 4350:
! 4351: % Active &'s sneak into the index arguments, so make sure it's defined.
! 4352: {
! 4353: \catcode`& = 13
! 4354: \global\let& = \ampnr
! 4355: }
! 4356:
! 4357: % First, defname, which formats the header line itself.
! 4358: % #1 should be the function name.
! 4359: % #2 should be the type of definition, such as "Function".
! 4360:
! 4361: \def\defname #1#2{%
! 4362: % Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were
! 4363: % outside the @def...
! 4364: \dimen2=\leftskip
! 4365: \advance\dimen2 by -\defbodyindent
! 4366: \noindent
! 4367: \setbox0=\hbox{\hskip \deflastargmargin{\rm #2}\hskip \deftypemargin}%
! 4368: \dimen0=\hsize \advance \dimen0 by -\wd0 % compute size for first line
! 4369: \dimen1=\hsize \advance \dimen1 by -\defargsindent %size for continuations
! 4370: \parshape 2 0in \dimen0 \defargsindent \dimen1
! 4371: % Now output arg 2 ("Function" or some such)
! 4372: % ending at \deftypemargin from the right margin,
! 4373: % but stuck inside a box of width 0 so it does not interfere with linebreaking
! 4374: {% Adjust \hsize to exclude the ambient margins,
! 4375: % so that \rightline will obey them.
! 4376: \advance \hsize by -\dimen2
! 4377: \rlap{\rightline{{\rm #2}\hskip -1.25pc }}}%
! 4378: % Make all lines underfull and no complaints:
! 4379: \tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000
! 4380: \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
! 4381: \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
! 4382: {\df #1}\enskip % Generate function name
! 4383: }
! 4384:
! 4385: % Actually process the body of a definition
! 4386: % #1 should be the terminating control sequence, such as \Edefun.
! 4387: % #2 should be the "another name" control sequence, such as \defunx.
! 4388: % #3 should be the control sequence that actually processes the header,
! 4389: % such as \defunheader.
! 4390:
! 4391: \def\defparsebody #1#2#3{\begingroup\inENV% Environment for definitionbody
! 4392: \medbreak %
! 4393: % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
! 4394: % so that it will exit this group.
! 4395: \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
! 4396: \def#2{\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit#3}%
! 4397: \parindent=0in
! 4398: \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
! 4399: \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
! 4400: \begingroup %
! 4401: \catcode 61=\active % 61 is `='
! 4402: \obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit#3}
! 4403:
! 4404: % #1 is the \E... control sequence to end the definition (which we define).
! 4405: % #2 is the \...x control sequence for consecutive fns (which we define).
! 4406: % #3 is the control sequence to call to resume processing.
! 4407: % #4, delimited by the space, is the class name.
! 4408: %
! 4409: \def\defmethparsebody#1#2#3#4 {\begingroup\inENV %
! 4410: \medbreak %
! 4411: % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
! 4412: % so that it will exit this group.
! 4413: \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
! 4414: \def#2##1 {\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##1}}}%
! 4415: \parindent=0in
! 4416: \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
! 4417: \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
! 4418: \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#4}}}
! 4419:
! 4420: % Used for @deftypemethod and @deftypeivar.
! 4421: % #1 is the \E... control sequence to end the definition (which we define).
! 4422: % #2 is the \...x control sequence for consecutive fns (which we define).
! 4423: % #3 is the control sequence to call to resume processing.
! 4424: % #4, delimited by a space, is the class name.
! 4425: % #5 is the method's return type.
! 4426: %
! 4427: \def\deftypemethparsebody#1#2#3#4 #5 {\begingroup\inENV
! 4428: \medbreak
! 4429: \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
! 4430: \def#2##1 ##2 {\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##1}{##2}}}%
! 4431: \parindent=0in
! 4432: \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
! 4433: \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
! 4434: \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#4}{#5}}}
! 4435:
! 4436: % Used for @deftypeop. The change from \deftypemethparsebody is an
! 4437: % extra argument at the beginning which is the `category', instead of it
! 4438: % being the hardwired string `Method' or `Instance Variable'. We have
! 4439: % to account for this both in the \...x definition and in parsing the
! 4440: % input at hand. Thus also need a control sequence (passed as #5) for
! 4441: % the \E... definition to assign the category name to.
! 4442: %
! 4443: \def\deftypeopparsebody#1#2#3#4#5 #6 {\begingroup\inENV
! 4444: \medbreak
! 4445: \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
! 4446: \def#2##1 ##2 ##3 {%
! 4447: \def#4{##1}%
! 4448: \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##2}{##3}}}%
! 4449: \parindent=0in
! 4450: \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
! 4451: \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
! 4452: \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#5}{#6}}}
! 4453:
! 4454: \def\defopparsebody #1#2#3#4#5 {\begingroup\inENV %
! 4455: \medbreak %
! 4456: % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
! 4457: % so that it will exit this group.
! 4458: \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
! 4459: \def#2##1 ##2 {\def#4{##1}%
! 4460: \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##2}}}%
! 4461: \parindent=0in
! 4462: \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
! 4463: \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
! 4464: \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#5}}}
! 4465:
! 4466: % These parsing functions are similar to the preceding ones
! 4467: % except that they do not make parens into active characters.
! 4468: % These are used for "variables" since they have no arguments.
! 4469:
! 4470: \def\defvarparsebody #1#2#3{\begingroup\inENV% Environment for definitionbody
! 4471: \medbreak %
! 4472: % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
! 4473: % so that it will exit this group.
! 4474: \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
! 4475: \def#2{\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit#3}%
! 4476: \parindent=0in
! 4477: \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
! 4478: \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
! 4479: \begingroup %
! 4480: \catcode 61=\active %
! 4481: \obeylines\spacesplit#3}
! 4482:
! 4483: % This is used for \def{tp,vr}parsebody. It could probably be used for
! 4484: % some of the others, too, with some judicious conditionals.
! 4485: %
! 4486: \def\parsebodycommon#1#2#3{%
! 4487: \begingroup\inENV %
! 4488: \medbreak %
! 4489: % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
! 4490: % so that it will exit this group.
! 4491: \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
! 4492: \def#2##1 {\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{##1}}}%
! 4493: \parindent=0in
! 4494: \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
! 4495: \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
! 4496: \begingroup\obeylines
! 4497: }
! 4498:
! 4499: \def\defvrparsebody#1#2#3#4 {%
! 4500: \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
! 4501: \spacesplit{#3{#4}}%
! 4502: }
! 4503:
! 4504: % This loses on `@deftp {Data Type} {struct termios}' -- it thinks the
! 4505: % type is just `struct', because we lose the braces in `{struct
! 4506: % termios}' when \spacesplit reads its undelimited argument. Sigh.
! 4507: % \let\deftpparsebody=\defvrparsebody
! 4508: %
! 4509: % So, to get around this, we put \empty in with the type name. That
! 4510: % way, TeX won't find exactly `{...}' as an undelimited argument, and
! 4511: % won't strip off the braces.
! 4512: %
! 4513: \def\deftpparsebody #1#2#3#4 {%
! 4514: \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
! 4515: \spacesplit{\parsetpheaderline{#3{#4}}}\empty
! 4516: }
! 4517:
! 4518: % Fine, but then we have to eventually remove the \empty *and* the
! 4519: % braces (if any). That's what this does.
! 4520: %
! 4521: \def\removeemptybraces\empty#1\relax{#1}
! 4522:
! 4523: % After \spacesplit has done its work, this is called -- #1 is the final
! 4524: % thing to call, #2 the type name (which starts with \empty), and #3
! 4525: % (which might be empty) the arguments.
! 4526: %
! 4527: \def\parsetpheaderline#1#2#3{%
! 4528: #1{\removeemptybraces#2\relax}{#3}%
! 4529: }%
! 4530:
! 4531: \def\defopvarparsebody #1#2#3#4#5 {\begingroup\inENV %
! 4532: \medbreak %
! 4533: % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
! 4534: % so that it will exit this group.
! 4535: \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
! 4536: \def#2##1 ##2 {\def#4{##1}%
! 4537: \begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{##2}}}%
! 4538: \parindent=0in
! 4539: \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
! 4540: \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
! 4541: \begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{#5}}}
! 4542:
! 4543: % Split up #2 at the first space token.
! 4544: % call #1 with two arguments:
! 4545: % the first is all of #2 before the space token,
! 4546: % the second is all of #2 after that space token.
! 4547: % If #2 contains no space token, all of it is passed as the first arg
! 4548: % and the second is passed as empty.
! 4549:
! 4550: {\obeylines
! 4551: \gdef\spacesplit#1#2^^M{\endgroup\spacesplitfoo{#1}#2 \relax\spacesplitfoo}%
! 4552: \long\gdef\spacesplitfoo#1#2 #3#4\spacesplitfoo{%
! 4553: \ifx\relax #3%
! 4554: #1{#2}{}\else #1{#2}{#3#4}\fi}}
! 4555:
! 4556: % So much for the things common to all kinds of definitions.
! 4557:
! 4558: % Define @defun.
! 4559:
! 4560: % First, define the processing that is wanted for arguments of \defun
! 4561: % Use this to expand the args and terminate the paragraph they make up
! 4562:
! 4563: \def\defunargs#1{\functionparens \sl
! 4564: % Expand, preventing hyphenation at `-' chars.
! 4565: % Note that groups don't affect changes in \hyphenchar.
! 4566: % Set the font temporarily and use \font in case \setfont made \tensl a macro.
! 4567: {\tensl\hyphenchar\font=0}%
! 4568: #1%
! 4569: {\tensl\hyphenchar\font=45}%
! 4570: \ifnum\parencount=0 \else \errmessage{Unbalanced parentheses in @def}\fi%
! 4571: \interlinepenalty=10000
! 4572: \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil
! 4573: \endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak
! 4574: }
! 4575:
! 4576: \def\deftypefunargs #1{%
! 4577: % Expand, preventing hyphenation at `-' chars.
! 4578: % Note that groups don't affect changes in \hyphenchar.
! 4579: % Use \boldbraxnoamp, not \functionparens, so that & is not special.
! 4580: \boldbraxnoamp
! 4581: \tclose{#1}% avoid \code because of side effects on active chars
! 4582: \interlinepenalty=10000
! 4583: \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil
! 4584: \endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak
! 4585: }
! 4586:
! 4587: % Do complete processing of one @defun or @defunx line already parsed.
! 4588:
! 4589: % @deffn Command forward-char nchars
! 4590:
! 4591: \def\deffn{\defmethparsebody\Edeffn\deffnx\deffnheader}
! 4592:
! 4593: \def\deffnheader #1#2#3{\doind {fn}{\code{#2}}%
! 4594: \begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\defunargs{#3}\endgroup %
! 4595: \catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
! 4596: }
! 4597:
! 4598: % @defun == @deffn Function
! 4599:
! 4600: \def\defun{\defparsebody\Edefun\defunx\defunheader}
! 4601:
! 4602: \def\defunheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index
! 4603: \begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDeffunc}%
! 4604: \defunargs {#2}\endgroup %
! 4605: \catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
! 4606: }
! 4607:
! 4608: % @deftypefun int foobar (int @var{foo}, float @var{bar})
! 4609:
! 4610: \def\deftypefun{\defparsebody\Edeftypefun\deftypefunx\deftypefunheader}
! 4611:
! 4612: % #1 is the data type. #2 is the name and args.
! 4613: \def\deftypefunheader #1#2{\deftypefunheaderx{#1}#2 \relax}
! 4614: % #1 is the data type, #2 the name, #3 the args.
! 4615: \def\deftypefunheaderx #1#2 #3\relax{%
! 4616: \doind {fn}{\code{#2}}% Make entry in function index
! 4617: \begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#1\relax$$$#2}{\putwordDeftypefun}%
! 4618: \deftypefunargs {#3}\endgroup %
! 4619: \catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
! 4620: }
! 4621:
! 4622: % @deftypefn {Library Function} int foobar (int @var{foo}, float @var{bar})
! 4623:
! 4624: \def\deftypefn{\defmethparsebody\Edeftypefn\deftypefnx\deftypefnheader}
! 4625:
! 4626: % \defheaderxcond#1\relax$$$
! 4627: % puts #1 in @code, followed by a space, but does nothing if #1 is null.
! 4628: \def\defheaderxcond#1#2$$${\ifx#1\relax\else\code{#1#2} \fi}
! 4629:
! 4630: % #1 is the classification. #2 is the data type. #3 is the name and args.
! 4631: \def\deftypefnheader #1#2#3{\deftypefnheaderx{#1}{#2}#3 \relax}
! 4632: % #1 is the classification, #2 the data type, #3 the name, #4 the args.
! 4633: \def\deftypefnheaderx #1#2#3 #4\relax{%
! 4634: \doind {fn}{\code{#3}}% Make entry in function index
! 4635: \begingroup
! 4636: \normalparens % notably, turn off `&' magic, which prevents
! 4637: % at least some C++ text from working
! 4638: \defname {\defheaderxcond#2\relax$$$#3}{#1}%
! 4639: \deftypefunargs {#4}\endgroup %
! 4640: \catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
! 4641: }
! 4642:
! 4643: % @defmac == @deffn Macro
! 4644:
! 4645: \def\defmac{\defparsebody\Edefmac\defmacx\defmacheader}
! 4646:
! 4647: \def\defmacheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index
! 4648: \begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefmac}%
! 4649: \defunargs {#2}\endgroup %
! 4650: \catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
! 4651: }
! 4652:
! 4653: % @defspec == @deffn Special Form
! 4654:
! 4655: \def\defspec{\defparsebody\Edefspec\defspecx\defspecheader}
! 4656:
! 4657: \def\defspecheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index
! 4658: \begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefspec}%
! 4659: \defunargs {#2}\endgroup %
! 4660: \catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
! 4661: }
! 4662:
! 4663: % @defop CATEGORY CLASS OPERATION ARG...
! 4664: %
! 4665: \def\defop #1 {\def\defoptype{#1}%
! 4666: \defopparsebody\Edefop\defopx\defopheader\defoptype}
! 4667: %
! 4668: \def\defopheader#1#2#3{%
! 4669: \dosubind {fn}{\code{#2}}{\putwordon\ #1}% Make entry in function index
! 4670: \begingroup\defname {#2}{\defoptype\ \putwordon\ #1}%
! 4671: \defunargs {#3}\endgroup %
! 4672: }
! 4673:
! 4674: % @deftypeop CATEGORY CLASS TYPE OPERATION ARG...
! 4675: %
! 4676: \def\deftypeop #1 {\def\deftypeopcategory{#1}%
! 4677: \deftypeopparsebody\Edeftypeop\deftypeopx\deftypeopheader
! 4678: \deftypeopcategory}
! 4679: %
! 4680: % #1 is the class name, #2 the data type, #3 the operation name, #4 the args.
! 4681: \def\deftypeopheader#1#2#3#4{%
! 4682: \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% entry in function index
! 4683: \begingroup
! 4684: \defname{\defheaderxcond#2\relax$$$#3}
! 4685: {\deftypeopcategory\ \putwordon\ \code{#1}}%
! 4686: \deftypefunargs{#4}%
! 4687: \endgroup
! 4688: }
! 4689:
! 4690: % @deftypemethod CLASS TYPE METHOD ARG...
! 4691: %
! 4692: \def\deftypemethod{%
! 4693: \deftypemethparsebody\Edeftypemethod\deftypemethodx\deftypemethodheader}
! 4694: %
! 4695: % #1 is the class name, #2 the data type, #3 the method name, #4 the args.
! 4696: \def\deftypemethodheader#1#2#3#4{%
! 4697: \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% entry in function index
! 4698: \begingroup
! 4699: \defname{\defheaderxcond#2\relax$$$#3}{\putwordMethodon\ \code{#1}}%
! 4700: \deftypefunargs{#4}%
! 4701: \endgroup
! 4702: }
! 4703:
! 4704: % @deftypeivar CLASS TYPE VARNAME
! 4705: %
! 4706: \def\deftypeivar{%
! 4707: \deftypemethparsebody\Edeftypeivar\deftypeivarx\deftypeivarheader}
! 4708: %
! 4709: % #1 is the class name, #2 the data type, #3 the variable name.
! 4710: \def\deftypeivarheader#1#2#3{%
! 4711: \dosubind{vr}{\code{#3}}{\putwordof\ \code{#1}}% entry in variable index
! 4712: \begingroup
! 4713: \defname{#3}{\putwordInstanceVariableof\ \code{#1}}%
! 4714: \defvarargs{#3}%
! 4715: \endgroup
! 4716: }
! 4717:
! 4718: % @defmethod == @defop Method
! 4719: %
! 4720: \def\defmethod{\defmethparsebody\Edefmethod\defmethodx\defmethodheader}
! 4721: %
! 4722: % #1 is the class name, #2 the method name, #3 the args.
! 4723: \def\defmethodheader#1#2#3{%
! 4724: \dosubind{fn}{\code{#2}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% entry in function index
! 4725: \begingroup
! 4726: \defname{#2}{\putwordMethodon\ \code{#1}}%
! 4727: \defunargs{#3}%
! 4728: \endgroup
! 4729: }
! 4730:
! 4731: % @defcv {Class Option} foo-class foo-flag
! 4732:
! 4733: \def\defcv #1 {\def\defcvtype{#1}%
! 4734: \defopvarparsebody\Edefcv\defcvx\defcvarheader\defcvtype}
! 4735:
! 4736: \def\defcvarheader #1#2#3{%
! 4737: \dosubind {vr}{\code{#2}}{\putwordof\ #1}% Make entry in var index
! 4738: \begingroup\defname {#2}{\defcvtype\ \putwordof\ #1}%
! 4739: \defvarargs {#3}\endgroup %
! 4740: }
! 4741:
! 4742: % @defivar CLASS VARNAME == @defcv {Instance Variable} CLASS VARNAME
! 4743: %
! 4744: \def\defivar{\defvrparsebody\Edefivar\defivarx\defivarheader}
! 4745: %
! 4746: \def\defivarheader#1#2#3{%
! 4747: \dosubind {vr}{\code{#2}}{\putwordof\ #1}% entry in var index
! 4748: \begingroup
! 4749: \defname{#2}{\putwordInstanceVariableof\ #1}%
! 4750: \defvarargs{#3}%
! 4751: \endgroup
! 4752: }
! 4753:
! 4754: % @defvar
! 4755: % First, define the processing that is wanted for arguments of @defvar.
! 4756: % This is actually simple: just print them in roman.
! 4757: % This must expand the args and terminate the paragraph they make up
! 4758: \def\defvarargs #1{\normalparens #1%
! 4759: \interlinepenalty=10000
! 4760: \endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak}
! 4761:
! 4762: % @defvr Counter foo-count
! 4763:
! 4764: \def\defvr{\defvrparsebody\Edefvr\defvrx\defvrheader}
! 4765:
! 4766: \def\defvrheader #1#2#3{\doind {vr}{\code{#2}}%
! 4767: \begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\defvarargs{#3}\endgroup}
! 4768:
! 4769: % @defvar == @defvr Variable
! 4770:
! 4771: \def\defvar{\defvarparsebody\Edefvar\defvarx\defvarheader}
! 4772:
! 4773: \def\defvarheader #1#2{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in var index
! 4774: \begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefvar}%
! 4775: \defvarargs {#2}\endgroup %
! 4776: }
! 4777:
! 4778: % @defopt == @defvr {User Option}
! 4779:
! 4780: \def\defopt{\defvarparsebody\Edefopt\defoptx\defoptheader}
! 4781:
! 4782: \def\defoptheader #1#2{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in var index
! 4783: \begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefopt}%
! 4784: \defvarargs {#2}\endgroup %
! 4785: }
! 4786:
! 4787: % @deftypevar int foobar
! 4788:
! 4789: \def\deftypevar{\defvarparsebody\Edeftypevar\deftypevarx\deftypevarheader}
! 4790:
! 4791: % #1 is the data type. #2 is the name, perhaps followed by text that
! 4792: % is actually part of the data type, which should not be put into the index.
! 4793: \def\deftypevarheader #1#2{%
! 4794: \dovarind#2 \relax% Make entry in variables index
! 4795: \begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#1\relax$$$#2}{\putwordDeftypevar}%
! 4796: \interlinepenalty=10000
! 4797: \endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak
! 4798: \endgroup}
! 4799: \def\dovarind#1 #2\relax{\doind{vr}{\code{#1}}}
! 4800:
! 4801: % @deftypevr {Global Flag} int enable
! 4802:
! 4803: \def\deftypevr{\defvrparsebody\Edeftypevr\deftypevrx\deftypevrheader}
! 4804:
! 4805: \def\deftypevrheader #1#2#3{\dovarind#3 \relax%
! 4806: \begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#2\relax$$$#3}{#1}
! 4807: \interlinepenalty=10000
! 4808: \endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak
! 4809: \endgroup}
! 4810:
! 4811: % Now define @deftp
! 4812: % Args are printed in bold, a slight difference from @defvar.
! 4813:
! 4814: \def\deftpargs #1{\bf \defvarargs{#1}}
! 4815:
! 4816: % @deftp Class window height width ...
! 4817:
! 4818: \def\deftp{\deftpparsebody\Edeftp\deftpx\deftpheader}
! 4819:
! 4820: \def\deftpheader #1#2#3{\doind {tp}{\code{#2}}%
! 4821: \begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\deftpargs{#3}\endgroup}
! 4822:
! 4823: % These definitions are used if you use @defunx (etc.)
! 4824: % anywhere other than immediately after a @defun or @defunx.
! 4825: %
! 4826: \def\defcvx#1 {\errmessage{@defcvx in invalid context}}
! 4827: \def\deffnx#1 {\errmessage{@deffnx in invalid context}}
! 4828: \def\defivarx#1 {\errmessage{@defivarx in invalid context}}
! 4829: \def\defmacx#1 {\errmessage{@defmacx in invalid context}}
! 4830: \def\defmethodx#1 {\errmessage{@defmethodx in invalid context}}
! 4831: \def\defoptx #1 {\errmessage{@defoptx in invalid context}}
! 4832: \def\defopx#1 {\errmessage{@defopx in invalid context}}
! 4833: \def\defspecx#1 {\errmessage{@defspecx in invalid context}}
! 4834: \def\deftpx#1 {\errmessage{@deftpx in invalid context}}
! 4835: \def\deftypefnx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypefnx in invalid context}}
! 4836: \def\deftypefunx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypefunx in invalid context}}
! 4837: \def\deftypeivarx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypeivarx in invalid context}}
! 4838: \def\deftypemethodx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypemethodx in invalid context}}
! 4839: \def\deftypeopx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypeopx in invalid context}}
! 4840: \def\deftypevarx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypevarx in invalid context}}
! 4841: \def\deftypevrx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypevrx in invalid context}}
! 4842: \def\defunx#1 {\errmessage{@defunx in invalid context}}
! 4843: \def\defvarx#1 {\errmessage{@defvarx in invalid context}}
! 4844: \def\defvrx#1 {\errmessage{@defvrx in invalid context}}
! 4845:
! 4846:
! 4847: \message{macros,}
! 4848: % @macro.
! 4849:
! 4850: % To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens,
! 4851: % which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX.
! 4852: \ifx\eTeXversion\undefined
! 4853: \newwrite\macscribble
! 4854: \def\scanmacro#1{%
! 4855: \begingroup \newlinechar`\^^M
! 4856: % Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex
! 4857: \catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=12 \escapechar=`\@
! 4858: % Append \endinput to make sure that TeX does not see the ending newline.
! 4859: \toks0={#1\endinput}%
! 4860: \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp
! 4861: \immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}%
! 4862: \immediate\closeout\macscribble
! 4863: \let\xeatspaces\eatspaces
! 4864: \input \jobname.tmp
! 4865: \endgroup
! 4866: }
! 4867: \else
! 4868: \def\scanmacro#1{%
! 4869: \begingroup \newlinechar`\^^M
! 4870: % Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex
! 4871: \catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=12 \escapechar=`\@
! 4872: \let\xeatspaces\eatspaces\scantokens{#1\endinput}\endgroup}
! 4873: \fi
! 4874:
! 4875: \newcount\paramno % Count of parameters
! 4876: \newtoks\macname % Macro name
! 4877: \newif\ifrecursive % Is it recursive?
! 4878: \def\macrolist{} % List of all defined macros in the form
! 4879: % \do\macro1\do\macro2...
! 4880:
! 4881: % Utility routines.
! 4882: % Thisdoes \let #1 = #2, except with \csnames.
! 4883: \def\cslet#1#2{%
! 4884: \expandafter\expandafter
! 4885: \expandafter\let
! 4886: \expandafter\expandafter
! 4887: \csname#1\endcsname
! 4888: \csname#2\endcsname}
! 4889:
! 4890: % Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string.
! 4891: % Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN).
! 4892: {\catcode`\@=11
! 4893: \gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@\expandafter{#1 }}
! 4894: \gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@}
! 4895: \gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @}
! 4896: \def\unbrace#1{#1}
! 4897: \unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@ #1 } #2@{#1}
! 4898: }
! 4899:
! 4900: % Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string.
! 4901: {\catcode`\^^M=12\catcode`\Q=3%
! 4902: \gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}%
! 4903: \gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}%
! 4904: \gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}%
! 4905: }
! 4906:
! 4907: % Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where
! 4908: % all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active
! 4909: % (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \.
! 4910:
! 4911: % It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is
! 4912: % done by making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro
! 4913: % body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro.
! 4914:
! 4915: \def\macrobodyctxt{%
! 4916: \catcode`\~=12
! 4917: \catcode`\^=12
! 4918: \catcode`\_=12
! 4919: \catcode`\|=12
! 4920: \catcode`\<=12
! 4921: \catcode`\>=12
! 4922: \catcode`\+=12
! 4923: \catcode`\{=12
! 4924: \catcode`\}=12
! 4925: \catcode`\@=12
! 4926: \catcode`\^^M=12
! 4927: \usembodybackslash}
! 4928:
! 4929: \def\macroargctxt{%
! 4930: \catcode`\~=12
! 4931: \catcode`\^=12
! 4932: \catcode`\_=12
! 4933: \catcode`\|=12
! 4934: \catcode`\<=12
! 4935: \catcode`\>=12
! 4936: \catcode`\+=12
! 4937: \catcode`\@=12
! 4938: \catcode`\\=12}
! 4939:
! 4940: % \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies.
! 4941: % It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N
! 4942: % where N is the macro parameter number.
! 4943: % We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so
! 4944: % \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash.
! 4945:
! 4946: {\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active
! 4947: @gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash}
! 4948: @gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname}
! 4949: }
! 4950: \expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash}
! 4951:
! 4952: \def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx}
! 4953: \def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx}
! 4954:
! 4955: \def\macroxxx#1{%
! 4956: \getargs{#1}% now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist
! 4957: \ifx\argl\empty % no arguments
! 4958: \paramno=0%
! 4959: \else
! 4960: \expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;%
! 4961: \fi
! 4962: \if1\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname
! 4963: \message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}%
! 4964: \else
! 4965: \expandafter\ifx\csname \the\macname\endcsname \relax
! 4966: \else \errmessage{The name \the\macname\space is reserved}\fi
! 4967: \global\cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}%
! 4968: \global\expandafter\let\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname=1%
! 4969: % Add the macroname to \macrolist
! 4970: \toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\do}%
! 4971: \xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0
! 4972: \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname\endcsname}%
! 4973: \fi
! 4974: \begingroup \macrobodyctxt
! 4975: \ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody
! 4976: \else \expandafter\parsemacbody
! 4977: \fi}
! 4978:
! 4979: \def\unmacro{\parsearg\unmacroxxx}
! 4980: \def\unmacroxxx#1{%
! 4981: \if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname
! 4982: \global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}%
! 4983: \global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0%
! 4984: % Remove the macro name from \macrolist
! 4985: \begingroup
! 4986: \edef\tempa{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname}%
! 4987: \def\do##1{%
! 4988: \def\tempb{##1}%
! 4989: \ifx\tempa\tempb
! 4990: % remove this
! 4991: \else
! 4992: \toks0 = \expandafter{\newmacrolist\do}%
! 4993: \edef\newmacrolist{\the\toks0\expandafter\noexpand\tempa}%
! 4994: \fi}%
! 4995: \def\newmacrolist{}%
! 4996: % Execute macro list to define \newmacrolist
! 4997: \macrolist
! 4998: \global\let\macrolist\newmacrolist
! 4999: \endgroup
! 5000: \else
! 5001: \errmessage{Macro #1 not defined}%
! 5002: \fi
! 5003: }
! 5004:
! 5005: % This makes use of the obscure feature that if the last token of a
! 5006: % <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by
! 5007: % an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed.
! 5008: \def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}}
! 5009: \def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs}
! 5010: \def\getmacname #1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}}
! 5011: \def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}}
! 5012:
! 5013: % Parse the optional {params} list. Set up \paramno and \paramlist
! 5014: % so \defmacro knows what to do. Define \macarg.blah for each blah
! 5015: % in the params list, to be ##N where N is the position in that list.
! 5016: % That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above).
! 5017:
! 5018: % We need to get `macro parameter char #' into several definitions.
! 5019: % The technique used is stolen from LaTeX: let \hash be something
! 5020: % unexpandable, insert that wherever you need a #, and then redefine
! 5021: % it to # just before using the token list produced.
! 5022: %
! 5023: % The same technique is used to protect \eatspaces till just before
! 5024: % the macro is used.
! 5025:
! 5026: \def\parsemargdef#1;{\paramno=0\def\paramlist{}%
! 5027: \let\hash\relax\let\xeatspaces\relax\parsemargdefxxx#1,;,}
! 5028: \def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{%
! 5029: \if#1;\let\next=\relax
! 5030: \else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx
! 5031: \advance\paramno by 1%
! 5032: \expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname
! 5033: {\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno}}%
! 5034: \edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}%
! 5035: \fi\next}
! 5036:
! 5037: % These two commands read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies.
! 5038: % (They're different since rec and nonrec macros end differently.)
! 5039:
! 5040: \long\def\parsemacbody#1@end macro%
! 5041: {\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
! 5042: \long\def\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro%
! 5043: {\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
! 5044:
! 5045: % This defines the macro itself. There are six cases: recursive and
! 5046: % nonrecursive macros of zero, one, and many arguments.
! 5047: % Much magic with \expandafter here.
! 5048: % \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file
! 5049: % they're defined in; @include reads the file inside a group.
! 5050: \def\defmacro{%
! 5051: \let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars
! 5052: \ifrecursive
! 5053: \ifcase\paramno
! 5054: % 0
! 5055: \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
! 5056: \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
! 5057: \or % 1
! 5058: \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
! 5059: \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
! 5060: \noexpand\braceorline
! 5061: \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
! 5062: \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
! 5063: \egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
! 5064: \else % many
! 5065: \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
! 5066: \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
! 5067: \noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
! 5068: \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
! 5069: \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
! 5070: \expandafter\expandafter
! 5071: \expandafter\xdef
! 5072: \expandafter\expandafter
! 5073: \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
! 5074: \paramlist{\egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
! 5075: \fi
! 5076: \else
! 5077: \ifcase\paramno
! 5078: % 0
! 5079: \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
! 5080: \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
! 5081: \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
! 5082: \or % 1
! 5083: \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
! 5084: \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
! 5085: \noexpand\braceorline
! 5086: \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
! 5087: \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
! 5088: \egroup
! 5089: \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
! 5090: \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
! 5091: \else % many
! 5092: \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
! 5093: \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
! 5094: \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
! 5095: \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
! 5096: \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
! 5097: \expandafter\expandafter
! 5098: \expandafter\xdef
! 5099: \expandafter\expandafter
! 5100: \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
! 5101: \paramlist{%
! 5102: \egroup
! 5103: \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
! 5104: \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
! 5105: \fi
! 5106: \fi}
! 5107:
! 5108: \def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}}
! 5109:
! 5110: % \braceorline decides whether the next nonwhitespace character is a
! 5111: % {. If so it reads up to the closing }, if not, it reads the whole
! 5112: % line. Whatever was read is then fed to the next control sequence
! 5113: % as an argument (by \parsebrace or \parsearg)
! 5114: \def\braceorline#1{\let\next=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx}
! 5115: \def\braceorlinexxx{%
! 5116: \ifx\nchar\bgroup\else
! 5117: \expandafter\parsearg
! 5118: \fi \next}
! 5119:
! 5120: % We mant to disable all macros during \shipout so that they are not
! 5121: % expanded by \write.
! 5122: \def\turnoffmacros{\begingroup \def\do##1{\let\noexpand##1=\relax}%
! 5123: \edef\next{\macrolist}\expandafter\endgroup\next}
! 5124:
! 5125:
! 5126: % @alias.
! 5127: % We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal
! 5128: % sign. Just make them active and then expand them all to nothing.
! 5129: \def\alias{\begingroup\obeyspaces\parsearg\aliasxxx}
! 5130: \def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax}
! 5131: \def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{\ignoreactivespaces
! 5132: \edef\next{\global\let\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname=%
! 5133: \expandafter\noexpand\csname#2\endcsname}%
! 5134: \expandafter\endgroup\next}
! 5135:
! 5136:
! 5137: \message{cross references,}
! 5138: % @xref etc.
! 5139:
! 5140: \newwrite\auxfile
! 5141:
! 5142: \newif\ifhavexrefs % True if xref values are known.
! 5143: \newif\ifwarnedxrefs % True if we warned once that they aren't known.
! 5144:
! 5145: % @inforef is relatively simple.
! 5146: \def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**}
! 5147: \def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{\putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}},
! 5148: node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}}
! 5149:
! 5150: % @node's job is to define \lastnode.
! 5151: \def\node{\ENVcheck\parsearg\nodezzz}
! 5152: \def\nodezzz#1{\nodexxx [#1,]}
! 5153: \def\nodexxx[#1,#2]{\gdef\lastnode{#1}}
! 5154: \let\nwnode=\node
! 5155: \let\lastnode=\relax
! 5156:
! 5157: % The sectioning commands (@chapter, etc.) call these.
! 5158: \def\donoderef{%
! 5159: \ifx\lastnode\relax\else
! 5160: \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}%
! 5161: {Ysectionnumberandtype}%
! 5162: \global\let\lastnode=\relax
! 5163: \fi
! 5164: }
! 5165: \def\unnumbnoderef{%
! 5166: \ifx\lastnode\relax\else
! 5167: \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}{Ynothing}%
! 5168: \global\let\lastnode=\relax
! 5169: \fi
! 5170: }
! 5171: \def\appendixnoderef{%
! 5172: \ifx\lastnode\relax\else
! 5173: \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}%
! 5174: {Yappendixletterandtype}%
! 5175: \global\let\lastnode=\relax
! 5176: \fi
! 5177: }
! 5178:
! 5179:
! 5180: % @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point.
! 5181: %
! 5182: \newcount\savesfregister
! 5183: \gdef\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi}
! 5184: \gdef\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi}
! 5185: \gdef\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces}
! 5186:
! 5187: % \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME, namely
! 5188: % NAME-title, NAME-pg, and NAME-SNT. Called from \foonoderef. We have
! 5189: % to set \indexdummies so commands such as @code in a section title
! 5190: % aren't expanded. It would be nicer not to expand the titles in the
! 5191: % first place, but there's so many layers that that is hard to do.
! 5192: %
! 5193: \def\setref#1#2{{%
! 5194: \indexdummies
! 5195: \pdfmkdest{#1}%
! 5196: \dosetq{#1-title}{Ytitle}%
! 5197: \dosetq{#1-pg}{Ypagenumber}%
! 5198: \dosetq{#1-snt}{#2}%
! 5199: }}
! 5200:
! 5201: % @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references. For \xrefX, #1 is
! 5202: % the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed
! 5203: % node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed
! 5204: % manual. All but the node name can be omitted.
! 5205: %
! 5206: \def\pxref#1{\putwordsee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
! 5207: \def\xref#1{\putwordSee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
! 5208: \def\ref#1{\xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
! 5209: \def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup
! 5210: \unsepspaces
! 5211: \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}%
! 5212: \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #3}%
! 5213: \setbox1=\hbox{\printedmanual}%
! 5214: \setbox0=\hbox{\printednodename}%
! 5215: \ifdim \wd0 = 0pt
! 5216: % No printed node name was explicitly given.
! 5217: \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname\relax
! 5218: % Use the node name inside the square brackets.
! 5219: \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}%
! 5220: \else
! 5221: % Use the actual chapter/section title appear inside
! 5222: % the square brackets. Use the real section title if we have it.
! 5223: \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
! 5224: % It is in another manual, so we don't have it.
! 5225: \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}%
! 5226: \else
! 5227: \ifhavexrefs
! 5228: % We know the real title if we have the xref values.
! 5229: \def\printednodename{\refx{#1-title}{}}%
! 5230: \else
! 5231: % Otherwise just copy the Info node name.
! 5232: \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}%
! 5233: \fi%
! 5234: \fi
! 5235: \fi
! 5236: \fi
! 5237: %
! 5238: % If we use \unhbox0 and \unhbox1 to print the node names, TeX does not
! 5239: % insert empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will
! 5240: % not find a line break at a hyphen in a node names. Since some manuals
! 5241: % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, this
! 5242: % is a loss. Therefore, we give the text of the node name again, so it
! 5243: % is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time.
! 5244: \ifpdf
! 5245: \leavevmode
! 5246: \getfilename{#4}%
! 5247: \ifnum\filenamelength>0
! 5248: \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
! 5249: goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{#1@}%
! 5250: \else
! 5251: \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
! 5252: goto name{#1@}%
! 5253: \fi
! 5254: \linkcolor
! 5255: \fi
! 5256: %
! 5257: \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
! 5258: \putwordsection{} ``\printednodename'' \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}%
! 5259: \else
! 5260: % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the
! 5261: % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand
! 5262: % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of
! 5263: % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the
! 5264: % printing, back off for the \refx-pg.
! 5265: {\normalturnoffactive
! 5266: % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for
! 5267: % @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be.
! 5268: \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}%
! 5269: \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi
! 5270: }%
! 5271: % [mynode],
! 5272: [\printednodename],\space
! 5273: % page 3
! 5274: \turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}%
! 5275: \fi
! 5276: \endlink
! 5277: \endgroup}
! 5278:
! 5279: % \dosetq is the interface for calls from other macros
! 5280:
! 5281: % Use \normalturnoffactive so that punctuation chars such as underscore
! 5282: % and backslash work in node names. (\turnoffactive doesn't do \.)
! 5283: \def\dosetq#1#2{%
! 5284: {\let\folio=0%
! 5285: \normalturnoffactive
! 5286: \edef\next{\write\auxfile{\internalsetq{#1}{#2}}}%
! 5287: \iflinks
! 5288: \next
! 5289: \fi
! 5290: }%
! 5291: }
! 5292:
! 5293: % \internalsetq {foo}{page} expands into
! 5294: % CHARACTERS 'xrdef {foo}{...expansion of \Ypage...}
! 5295: % When the aux file is read, ' is the escape character
! 5296:
! 5297: \def\internalsetq #1#2{'xrdef {#1}{\csname #2\endcsname}}
! 5298:
! 5299: % Things to be expanded by \internalsetq
! 5300:
! 5301: \def\Ypagenumber{\folio}
! 5302:
! 5303: \def\Ytitle{\thissection}
! 5304:
! 5305: \def\Ynothing{}
! 5306:
! 5307: \def\Ysectionnumberandtype{%
! 5308: \ifnum\secno=0 \putwordChapter\xreftie\the\chapno %
! 5309: \else \ifnum \subsecno=0 \putwordSection\xreftie\the\chapno.\the\secno %
! 5310: \else \ifnum \subsubsecno=0 %
! 5311: \putwordSection\xreftie\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno %
! 5312: \else %
! 5313: \putwordSection\xreftie\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno %
! 5314: \fi \fi \fi }
! 5315:
! 5316: \def\Yappendixletterandtype{%
! 5317: \ifnum\secno=0 \putwordAppendix\xreftie'char\the\appendixno{}%
! 5318: \else \ifnum \subsecno=0 \putwordSection\xreftie'char\the\appendixno.\the\secno %
! 5319: \else \ifnum \subsubsecno=0 %
! 5320: \putwordSection\xreftie'char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno %
! 5321: \else %
! 5322: \putwordSection\xreftie'char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno %
! 5323: \fi \fi \fi }
! 5324:
! 5325: \gdef\xreftie{'tie}
! 5326:
! 5327: % Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error
! 5328: % messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.
! 5329: %
! 5330: \ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined
! 5331: \let\linenumber = \empty % Non-3.0.
! 5332: \else
! 5333: \def\linenumber{\the\inputlineno:\space}
! 5334: \fi
! 5335:
! 5336: % Define \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} to reference a cross-reference string named NAME.
! 5337: % If its value is nonempty, SUFFIX is output afterward.
! 5338:
! 5339: \def\refx#1#2{%
! 5340: \expandafter\ifx\csname X#1\endcsname\relax
! 5341: % If not defined, say something at least.
! 5342: \angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright
! 5343: \iflinks
! 5344: \ifhavexrefs
! 5345: \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `#1'.}%
! 5346: \else
! 5347: \ifwarnedxrefs\else
! 5348: \global\warnedxrefstrue
! 5349: \message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}%
! 5350: \fi
! 5351: \fi
! 5352: \fi
! 5353: \else
! 5354: % It's defined, so just use it.
! 5355: \csname X#1\endcsname
! 5356: \fi
! 5357: #2% Output the suffix in any case.
! 5358: }
! 5359:
! 5360: % This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file.
! 5361: %
! 5362: \def\xrdef#1{\begingroup
! 5363: % Reenable \ as an escape while reading the second argument.
! 5364: \catcode`\\ = 0
! 5365: \afterassignment\endgroup
! 5366: \expandafter\gdef\csname X#1\endcsname
! 5367: }
! 5368:
! 5369: % Read the last existing aux file, if any. No error if none exists.
! 5370: \def\readauxfile{\begingroup
! 5371: \catcode`\^^@=\other
! 5372: \catcode`\^^A=\other
! 5373: \catcode`\^^B=\other
! 5374: \catcode`\^^C=\other
! 5375: \catcode`\^^D=\other
! 5376: \catcode`\^^E=\other
! 5377: \catcode`\^^F=\other
! 5378: \catcode`\^^G=\other
! 5379: \catcode`\^^H=\other
! 5380: \catcode`\^^K=\other
! 5381: \catcode`\^^L=\other
! 5382: \catcode`\^^N=\other
! 5383: \catcode`\^^P=\other
! 5384: \catcode`\^^Q=\other
! 5385: \catcode`\^^R=\other
! 5386: \catcode`\^^S=\other
! 5387: \catcode`\^^T=\other
! 5388: \catcode`\^^U=\other
! 5389: \catcode`\^^V=\other
! 5390: \catcode`\^^W=\other
! 5391: \catcode`\^^X=\other
! 5392: \catcode`\^^Z=\other
! 5393: \catcode`\^^[=\other
! 5394: \catcode`\^^\=\other
! 5395: \catcode`\^^]=\other
! 5396: \catcode`\^^^=\other
! 5397: \catcode`\^^_=\other
! 5398: \catcode`\@=\other
! 5399: \catcode`\^=\other
! 5400: % It was suggested to define this as 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc.
! 5401: % in xref tags, i.e., node names. But since ^^e4 notation isn't
! 5402: % supported in the main text, it doesn't seem desirable. Furthermore,
! 5403: % that is not enough: for node names that actually contain a ^
! 5404: % character, we would end up writing a line like this: 'xrdef {'hat
! 5405: % b-title}{'hat b} and \xrdef does a \csname...\endcsname on the first
! 5406: % argument, and \hat is not an expandable control sequence. It could
! 5407: % all be worked out, but why? Either we support ^^ or we don't.
! 5408: %
! 5409: % The other change necessary for this was to define \auxhat:
! 5410: % \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat }}% extra space so ok if followed by letter
! 5411: % and then to call \auxhat in \setq.
! 5412: %
! 5413: \catcode`\~=\other
! 5414: \catcode`\[=\other
! 5415: \catcode`\]=\other
! 5416: \catcode`\"=\other
! 5417: \catcode`\_=\other
! 5418: \catcode`\|=\other
! 5419: \catcode`\<=\other
! 5420: \catcode`\>=\other
! 5421: \catcode`\$=\other
! 5422: \catcode`\#=\other
! 5423: \catcode`\&=\other
! 5424: \catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off
! 5425: % Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters
! 5426: {%
! 5427: \count 1=128
! 5428: \def\loop{%
! 5429: \catcode\count 1=\other
! 5430: \advance\count 1 by 1
! 5431: \ifnum \count 1<256 \loop \fi
! 5432: }%
! 5433: }%
! 5434: % The aux file uses ' as the escape (for now).
! 5435: % Turn off \ as an escape so we do not lose on
! 5436: % entries which were dumped with control sequences in their names.
! 5437: % For example, 'xrdef {$\leq $-fun}{page ...} made by @defun ^^
! 5438: % Reference to such entries still does not work the way one would wish,
! 5439: % but at least they do not bomb out when the aux file is read in.
! 5440: \catcode`\{=1
! 5441: \catcode`\}=2
! 5442: \catcode`\%=\other
! 5443: \catcode`\'=0
! 5444: \catcode`\\=\other
! 5445: %
! 5446: \openin 1 \jobname.aux
! 5447: \ifeof 1 \else
! 5448: \closein 1
! 5449: \input \jobname.aux
! 5450: \global\havexrefstrue
! 5451: \global\warnedobstrue
! 5452: \fi
! 5453: % Open the new aux file. TeX will close it automatically at exit.
! 5454: \openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux
! 5455: \endgroup}
! 5456:
! 5457:
! 5458: % Footnotes.
! 5459:
! 5460: \newcount \footnoteno
! 5461:
! 5462: % The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is
! 5463: % vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a
! 5464: % pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is
! 5465: % removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a
! 5466: % space to prevent strange expansion errors.)
! 5467: \def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 }
! 5468:
! 5469: % @footnotestyle is meaningful for info output only.
! 5470: \let\footnotestyle=\comment
! 5471:
! 5472: \let\ptexfootnote=\footnote
! 5473:
! 5474: {\catcode `\@=11
! 5475: %
! 5476: % Auto-number footnotes. Otherwise like plain.
! 5477: \gdef\footnote{%
! 5478: \global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne
! 5479: \edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}%
! 5480: %
! 5481: % In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the
! 5482: % extra spacing after we do the footnote number.
! 5483: \let\@sf\empty
! 5484: \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\/\fi
! 5485: %
! 5486: % Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number.
! 5487: \unskip
! 5488: \thisfootno\@sf
! 5489: \footnotezzz
! 5490: }%
! 5491:
! 5492: % Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the
! 5493: % footnote text as a parameter. Our footnotes don't need to be so general.
! 5494: %
! 5495: % Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset and anything else that uses
! 5496: % \parseargline fail inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when
! 5497: % the footnote is read. --karl, 16nov96.
! 5498: %
! 5499: \long\gdef\footnotezzz{\insert\footins\bgroup
! 5500: % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the
! 5501: % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment.
! 5502: % So reset some parameters.
! 5503: \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
! 5504: \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes
! 5505: \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox
! 5506: \floatingpenalty\@MM
! 5507: \leftskip\z@skip
! 5508: \rightskip\z@skip
! 5509: \spaceskip\z@skip
! 5510: \xspaceskip\z@skip
! 5511: \parindent\defaultparindent
! 5512: %
! 5513: \smallfonts \rm
! 5514: %
! 5515: % Hang the footnote text off the number.
! 5516: \hang
! 5517: \textindent{\thisfootno}%
! 5518: %
! 5519: % Don't crash into the line above the footnote text. Since this
! 5520: % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it
! 5521: % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote.
! 5522: \footstrut
! 5523: \futurelet\next\fo@t
! 5524: }
! 5525: \def\fo@t{\ifcat\bgroup\noexpand\next \let\next\f@@t
! 5526: \else\let\next\f@t\fi \next}
! 5527: \def\f@@t{\bgroup\aftergroup\@foot\let\next}
! 5528: \def\f@t#1{#1\@foot}
! 5529: \def\@foot{\strut\par\egroup}
! 5530:
! 5531: }%end \catcode `\@=11
! 5532:
! 5533: % Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size
! 5534: % correspondingly. There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers
! 5535: % used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined.
! 5536: %
! 5537: \def\lineskipfactor{.08333}
! 5538: \def\strutheightpercent{.70833}
! 5539: \def\strutdepthpercent {.29167}
! 5540: %
! 5541: \def\setleading#1{%
! 5542: \normalbaselineskip = #1\relax
! 5543: \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip
! 5544: \normalbaselines
! 5545: \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{%
! 5546: \vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip
! 5547: depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip
! 5548: }%
! 5549: }
! 5550:
! 5551: % @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line. It should
! 5552: % surround any changed text. This approach does *not* work if the
! 5553: % change spans more than two lines of output. To handle that, we would
! 5554: % have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main
! 5555: % vertical list for the beginning and end of each change).
! 5556: %
! 5557: \def\|{%
! 5558: % \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode.
! 5559: \leavevmode
! 5560: %
! 5561: % Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output.
! 5562: \vadjust{%
! 5563: % We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current
! 5564: % leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record.
! 5565: \vskip-\baselineskip
! 5566: %
! 5567: % \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type. So
! 5568: % the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin.
! 5569: \llap{%
! 5570: %
! 5571: % For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'.
! 5572: \vrule height\baselineskip width1pt
! 5573: %
! 5574: % This is the space between the bar and the text.
! 5575: \hskip 12pt
! 5576: }%
! 5577: }%
! 5578: }
! 5579:
! 5580: % For a final copy, take out the rectangles
! 5581: % that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided
! 5582: % that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin).
! 5583: %
! 5584: \def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt}
! 5585:
! 5586: % @image. We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this.
! 5587: % If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain.
! 5588: %
! 5589: % Check for and read epsf.tex up front. If we read it only at @image
! 5590: % time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get
! 5591: % undone and the next image would fail.
! 5592: \openin 1 = epsf.tex
! 5593: \ifeof 1 \else
! 5594: \closein 1
! 5595: % Do not bother showing banner with post-v2.7 epsf.tex (available in
! 5596: % doc/epsf.tex until it shows up on ctan).
! 5597: \def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }%
! 5598: \input epsf.tex
! 5599: \fi
! 5600: %
! 5601: % We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex.
! 5602: \newif\ifwarnednoepsf
! 5603: \newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to
! 5604: work. It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get
! 5605: it from ftp://tug.org/tex/epsf.tex.}
! 5606: %
! 5607: \def\image#1{%
! 5608: \ifx\epsfbox\undefined
! 5609: \ifwarnednoepsf \else
! 5610: \errhelp = \noepsfhelp
! 5611: \errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}%
! 5612: \global\warnednoepsftrue
! 5613: \fi
! 5614: \else
! 5615: \imagexxx #1,,,\finish
! 5616: \fi
! 5617: }
! 5618: %
! 5619: % Arguments to @image:
! 5620: % #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension.
! 5621: % #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height.
! 5622: % #4 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing this stuff.
! 5623: \def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{%
! 5624: \ifpdf
! 5625: \centerline{\dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}}%
! 5626: \else
! 5627: % \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure.
! 5628: \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi
! 5629: \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi
! 5630: \begingroup
! 5631: \catcode`\^^M = 5 % in case we're inside an example
! 5632: % If the image is by itself, center it.
! 5633: \ifvmode
! 5634: \nobreak\bigskip
! 5635: % Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert
! 5636: % \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space
! 5637: % above and below.
! 5638: \nobreak\vskip\parskip
! 5639: \nobreak
! 5640: \centerline{\epsfbox{#1.eps}}%
! 5641: \bigbreak
! 5642: \else
! 5643: % In the middle of a paragraph, no extra space.
! 5644: \epsfbox{#1.eps}%
! 5645: \fi
! 5646: \endgroup
! 5647: \fi
! 5648: }
! 5649:
! 5650:
! 5651: \message{localization,}
! 5652: % and i18n.
! 5653:
! 5654: % @documentlanguage is usually given very early, just after
! 5655: % @setfilename. If done too late, it may not override everything
! 5656: % properly. Single argument is the language abbreviation.
! 5657: % It would be nice if we could set up a hyphenation file here.
! 5658: %
! 5659: \def\documentlanguage{\parsearg\dodocumentlanguage}
! 5660: \def\dodocumentlanguage#1{%
! 5661: \tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX.
! 5662: % Read the file if it exists.
! 5663: \openin 1 txi-#1.tex
! 5664: \ifeof1
! 5665: \errhelp = \nolanghelp
! 5666: \errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}%
! 5667: \let\temp = \relax
! 5668: \else
! 5669: \def\temp{\input txi-#1.tex }%
! 5670: \fi
! 5671: \temp
! 5672: \endgroup
! 5673: }
! 5674: \newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or
! 5675: is empty. Maybe you need to install it? In the current directory
! 5676: should work if nowhere else does.}
! 5677:
! 5678:
! 5679: % @documentencoding should change something in TeX eventually, most
! 5680: % likely, but for now just recognize it.
! 5681: \let\documentencoding = \comment
! 5682:
! 5683:
! 5684: % Page size parameters.
! 5685: %
! 5686: \newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt
! 5687:
! 5688: \chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt
! 5689: \secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt
! 5690: \subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt
! 5691:
! 5692: % Prevent underfull vbox error messages.
! 5693: \vbadness = 10000
! 5694:
! 5695: % Don't be so finicky about underfull hboxes, either.
! 5696: \hbadness = 2000
! 5697:
! 5698: % Following George Bush, just get rid of widows and orphans.
! 5699: \widowpenalty=10000
! 5700: \clubpenalty=10000
! 5701:
! 5702: % Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're
! 5703: % using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. We want the amount of
! 5704: % stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on
! 5705: % \hsize. We call this whenever the paper size is set.
! 5706: %
! 5707: \def\setemergencystretch{%
! 5708: \ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined
! 5709: % Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway.
! 5710: \def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}%
! 5711: \else
! 5712: \emergencystretch = .15\hsize
! 5713: \fi
! 5714: }
! 5715:
! 5716: % Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth; 3) voffset;
! 5717: % 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip. Then whoever calls us can
! 5718: % set \parskip and call \setleading for \baselineskip.
! 5719: %
! 5720: \def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6{%
! 5721: \voffset = #3\relax
! 5722: \topskip = #6\relax
! 5723: \splittopskip = \topskip
! 5724: %
! 5725: \vsize = #1\relax
! 5726: \advance\vsize by \topskip
! 5727: \outervsize = \vsize
! 5728: \advance\outervsize by 2\topandbottommargin
! 5729: \pageheight = \vsize
! 5730: %
! 5731: \hsize = #2\relax
! 5732: \outerhsize = \hsize
! 5733: \advance\outerhsize by 0.5in
! 5734: \pagewidth = \hsize
! 5735: %
! 5736: \normaloffset = #4\relax
! 5737: \bindingoffset = #5\relax
! 5738: %
! 5739: \parindent = \defaultparindent
! 5740: \setemergencystretch
! 5741: }
! 5742:
! 5743: % @letterpaper (the default).
! 5744: \def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
! 5745: \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
! 5746: \setleading{13.2pt}%
! 5747: %
! 5748: % If page is nothing but text, make it come out even.
! 5749: \internalpagesizes{46\baselineskip}{6in}{\voffset}{.25in}{\bindingoffset}{36pt}%
! 5750: }}
! 5751:
! 5752: % Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.5 (or so) format.
! 5753: \def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1
! 5754: \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt
! 5755: \setleading{12pt}%
! 5756: %
! 5757: \internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5.in}{\voffset}{.25in}{\bindingoffset}{16pt}%
! 5758: %
! 5759: \lispnarrowing = 0.3in
! 5760: \tolerance = 700
! 5761: \hfuzz = 1pt
! 5762: \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
! 5763: \deftypemargin = 0pt
! 5764: \defbodyindent = .5cm
! 5765: %
! 5766: \let\smalldisplay = \smalldisplayx
! 5767: \let\smallexample = \smalllispx
! 5768: \let\smallformat = \smallformatx
! 5769: \let\smalllisp = \smalllispx
! 5770: }}
! 5771:
! 5772: % Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper.
! 5773: \def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
! 5774: \setleading{12pt}%
! 5775: \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
! 5776: %
! 5777: \internalpagesizes{53\baselineskip}{160mm}{\voffset}{4mm}{\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
! 5778: %
! 5779: \tolerance = 700
! 5780: \hfuzz = 1pt
! 5781: }}
! 5782:
! 5783: % A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper. Top margin
! 5784: % 29mm, hence bottom margin 28mm, nominal side margin 3cm.
! 5785: \def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1
! 5786: \setleading{13.6pt}%
! 5787: %
! 5788: \afourpaper
! 5789: \internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}{3.6mm}{3.6mm}{3mm}{7mm}%
! 5790: %
! 5791: \globaldefs = 0
! 5792: }}
! 5793:
! 5794: % Use @afourwide to print on European A4 paper in wide format.
! 5795: \def\afourwide{%
! 5796: \afourpaper
! 5797: \internalpagesizes{9.5in}{6.5in}{\hoffset}{\normaloffset}{\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
! 5798: %
! 5799: \globaldefs = 0
! 5800: }
! 5801:
! 5802: % @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH]
! 5803: % Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip,
! 5804: % and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow.
! 5805: %
! 5806: \def\pagesizes{\parsearg\pagesizesxxx}
! 5807: \def\pagesizesxxx#1{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish}
! 5808: \def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{%
! 5809: \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi
! 5810: \globaldefs = 1
! 5811: %
! 5812: \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
! 5813: \setleading{13.2pt}%
! 5814: %
! 5815: \internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}{\voffset}{\normaloffset}{\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
! 5816: }}
! 5817:
! 5818: % Set default to letter.
! 5819: %
! 5820: \letterpaper
! 5821:
! 5822:
! 5823: \message{and turning on texinfo input format.}
! 5824:
! 5825: % Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text.
! 5826: \catcode`\"=\other
! 5827: \catcode`\~=\other
! 5828: \catcode`\^=\other
! 5829: \catcode`\_=\other
! 5830: \catcode`\|=\other
! 5831: \catcode`\<=\other
! 5832: \catcode`\>=\other
! 5833: \catcode`\+=\other
! 5834: \catcode`\$=\other
! 5835: \def\normaldoublequote{"}
! 5836: \def\normaltilde{~}
! 5837: \def\normalcaret{^}
! 5838: \def\normalunderscore{_}
! 5839: \def\normalverticalbar{|}
! 5840: \def\normalless{<}
! 5841: \def\normalgreater{>}
! 5842: \def\normalplus{+}
! 5843: \def\normaldollar{$}
! 5844:
! 5845: % This macro is used to make a character print one way in ttfont
! 5846: % where it can probably just be output, and another way in other fonts,
! 5847: % where something hairier probably needs to be done.
! 5848: %
! 5849: % #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print
! 5850: % otherwise. Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero
! 5851: % interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all
! 5852: % typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter.
! 5853: %
! 5854: \def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi}
! 5855:
! 5856: % Same as above, but check for italic font. Actually this also catches
! 5857: % non-italic slanted fonts since it is impossible to distinguish them from
! 5858: % italic fonts. But since this is only used by $ and it uses \sl anyway
! 5859: % this is not a problem.
! 5860: \def\ifusingit#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt #1\else #2\fi}
! 5861:
! 5862: % Turn off all special characters except @
! 5863: % (and those which the user can use as if they were ordinary).
! 5864: % Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can
! 5865: % use math or other variants that look better in normal text.
! 5866:
! 5867: \catcode`\"=\active
! 5868: \def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}}
! 5869: \let"=\activedoublequote
! 5870: \catcode`\~=\active
! 5871: \def~{{\tt\char126}}
! 5872: \chardef\hat=`\^
! 5873: \catcode`\^=\active
! 5874: \def^{{\tt \hat}}
! 5875:
! 5876: \catcode`\_=\active
! 5877: \def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_}
! 5878: % Subroutine for the previous macro.
! 5879: \def\_{\leavevmode \kern.06em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}}
! 5880:
! 5881: \catcode`\|=\active
! 5882: \def|{{\tt\char124}}
! 5883: \chardef \less=`\<
! 5884: \catcode`\<=\active
! 5885: \def<{{\tt \less}}
! 5886: \chardef \gtr=`\>
! 5887: \catcode`\>=\active
! 5888: \def>{{\tt \gtr}}
! 5889: \catcode`\+=\active
! 5890: \def+{{\tt \char 43}}
! 5891: \catcode`\$=\active
! 5892: \def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}
! 5893: %\catcode 27=\active
! 5894: %\def^^[{$\diamondsuit$}
! 5895:
! 5896: % Set up an active definition for =, but don't enable it most of the time.
! 5897: {\catcode`\==\active
! 5898: \global\def={{\tt \char 61}}}
! 5899:
! 5900: \catcode`+=\active
! 5901: \catcode`\_=\active
! 5902:
! 5903: % If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file
! 5904: % name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line.
! 5905: % So turn them off again, and have \everyjob (or @setfilename) turn them on.
! 5906: % \otherifyactive is called near the end of this file.
! 5907: \def\otherifyactive{\catcode`+=\other \catcode`\_=\other}
! 5908:
! 5909: \catcode`\@=0
! 5910:
! 5911: % \rawbackslashxx output one backslash character in current font
! 5912: \global\chardef\rawbackslashxx=`\\
! 5913: %{\catcode`\\=\other
! 5914: %@gdef@rawbackslashxx{\}}
! 5915:
! 5916: % \rawbackslash redefines \ as input to do \rawbackslashxx.
! 5917: {\catcode`\\=\active
! 5918: @gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@rawbackslashxx }}
! 5919:
! 5920: % \normalbackslash outputs one backslash in fixed width font.
! 5921: \def\normalbackslash{{\tt\rawbackslashxx}}
! 5922:
! 5923: % \catcode 17=0 % Define control-q
! 5924: \catcode`\\=\active
! 5925:
! 5926: % Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters
! 5927: % even after parsing them.
! 5928: @def@turnoffactive{@let"=@normaldoublequote
! 5929: @let\=@realbackslash
! 5930: @let~=@normaltilde
! 5931: @let^=@normalcaret
! 5932: @let_=@normalunderscore
! 5933: @let|=@normalverticalbar
! 5934: @let<=@normalless
! 5935: @let>=@normalgreater
! 5936: @let+=@normalplus
! 5937: @let$=@normaldollar}
! 5938:
! 5939: @def@normalturnoffactive{@let"=@normaldoublequote
! 5940: @let\=@normalbackslash
! 5941: @let~=@normaltilde
! 5942: @let^=@normalcaret
! 5943: @let_=@normalunderscore
! 5944: @let|=@normalverticalbar
! 5945: @let<=@normalless
! 5946: @let>=@normalgreater
! 5947: @let+=@normalplus
! 5948: @let$=@normaldollar}
! 5949:
! 5950: % Make _ and + \other characters, temporarily.
! 5951: % This is canceled by @fixbackslash.
! 5952: @otherifyactive
! 5953:
! 5954: % If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up.
! 5955: % That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing
! 5956: % a backslash.
! 5957: %
! 5958: @gdef@eatinput input texinfo{@fixbackslash}
! 5959: @global@let\ = @eatinput
! 5960:
! 5961: % On the other hand, perhaps the file did not have a `\input texinfo'. Then
! 5962: % the first `\{ in the file would cause an error. This macro tries to fix
! 5963: % that, assuming it is called before the first `\' could plausibly occur.
! 5964: % Also back turn on active characters that might appear in the input
! 5965: % file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format.
! 5966: %
! 5967: @gdef@fixbackslash{%
! 5968: @ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @normalbackslash @fi
! 5969: @catcode`+=@active
! 5970: @catcode`@_=@active
! 5971: }
! 5972:
! 5973: % Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages.
! 5974: @escapechar = `@@
! 5975:
! 5976: % These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special.
! 5977: @catcode`@& = @other
! 5978: @catcode`@# = @other
! 5979: @catcode`@% = @other
! 5980:
! 5981: @c Set initial fonts.
! 5982: @textfonts
! 5983: @rm
! 5984:
! 5985:
! 5986: @c Local variables:
! 5987: @c eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp)
! 5988: @c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message"
! 5989: @c time-stamp-start: "def\\\\texinfoversion{"
! 5990: @c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H"
! 5991: @c time-stamp-end: "}"
! 5992: @c End:
FreeBSD-CVSweb <freebsd-cvsweb@FreeBSD.org>
![[BACK]](/icons/cvsweb/back.gif){kind=icon}
Return to texinfo.tex CVS log ![[TXT]](/icons/cvsweb/text.gif){kind=icon}
![[DIR]](/icons/cvsweb/dir.gif){kind=icon}
Up to [local] / OpenXM / src / OpenMath / doc